Pasolink Plus

316
6-38GHz 17/34MB DIGITAL MICROWAVE RADIO SYSTEM PLESIOCHRONOUS DIGITAL HIERARCHY PASOLINK + (PDH/1+1 SYSTEM) INSTRUCTION MANUAL ROI-S04223-051E 020409 NEC Corporation TOKYO, JAPAN

Transcript of Pasolink Plus

Page 1: Pasolink Plus

6-38GHz 17/34MBDIGITAL MICROWAVE RADIO SYSTEM

PLESIOCHRONOUS DIGITAL HIERARCHYPASOLINK +

(PDH/1+1 SYSTEM)

INSTRUCTION MANUAL

ROI-S04223-051E020409

NEC CorporationTOKYO, JAPAN

Page 2: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04223 CAUTION

-1-

CAUTION

In the case of using at marine and coastal areas (within 3 km from theseaside), it is necessary to make measures against the damage from saltwater. For measurements against the damage from salt water to anODU, request to NEC.

Page 3: Pasolink Plus

CAUTION ROI-S04223

-2-2 pages

(This page is intentionally left blank)

Page 4: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04223 WARNING

-1-

WARNING

1. After turning ON the equipment, wait at least 1 minutebefore turning it OFF again. Repeatedly turning the powerON and OFF with in a short interval may cause the IDU tofail.

2. The –43 V DC power is superimposed on the centerconductor of the coaxial cable between the IDU and theODU. Connecting a test set equipment directly to thisterminal may damage it and touching the coaxial cable coremay cause electrical shock.

3. Persons performing servicing must take necessary steps toavoid electro-static discharge which may damage themodules on the IDU or cause error. Wear a conductivewrist strap connected to the grounded (G) jack on the frontof the equipment shelf. This will minimize static build-upduring servicing.

4. Do not disconnect IF cable between the IDU and the ODUin operating condition, to avoid damaging the IDU andODU. Do not remove/connect the IF cable with IDU powerON, turn IDU power OFF before remounting the IF cable.

Page 5: Pasolink Plus

WARNING ROI-S04223

-2-2 Pages

(This page is intentionally left blank)

Page 6: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04223 PREFACE

-1-

PREFACE

This instruction manual has been prepared to provide descriptive andprocedural information on the PASOLINK + equipment used in the point-to-point digital microwave radio system for the plesiochronous digitalhierarchy (PDH) in 1 +1 configuration.

Included are:

• Safety Information ROI-S03950-052E Safety Information

• Abbreviation ROI-S03261-056E Abbreviations

• Section I ROI-S04051-052E Description

ROI-S04077-052E Appendix Radio FrequencyPlan for Pasolink+

• Section II ROI-S04052-052E Operation

• Section III ROI-S04053-052E Installation and Initial Lineup

• Section IV ROI-S04054-052E Maintenance

Page 7: Pasolink Plus

PREFACE ROI-S04223

-2-2 Pages

(This page is intentionally left blank.)

Page 8: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S03950-052E SAFETY INFORMATION011122

-1-

SAFETY INFORMATION

This safety information is prepared to protect the maintenance personneland PASOLINK+equipment. To avoid hazardous conditions, read thisInstruction manual thoroughly before equipment operation. The signalwords (Danger, Warning and Caution) are used in the Instruction manualand explained as follows:

To avoid hazardous conditions, notes on the handling of equipment areprovided in the Instruction manual in places considered necessary, adhererigidly to the notes. And also the Caution and Warning labels are attachedto the IDU and ODU. And the meaning of each label is described asfollows:

Signal Word Definition

DANGERIndicates an imminently hazardoussituation which, if not avoided, willresult in death or serious injury.

WARNINGIndicates an imminently hazardoussituation which, if not avoided, couldresult in serious injury.

CAUTION

Indicates a potentially hazardoussituation which, if not avoided, mayresult in minor or moderate injury ordamage to the equipment. It is alsosaid to alert against unsafe practice.

Page 9: Pasolink Plus

SAFETY INFORMATION ROI-S03950

-2-

WARNING!

Turn off power at IDUbefore disconnecting cable.

! CAUTION

HOT SURFACEAvoid contact

! WARNING-43V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWERBEFORE DISCONNECTING

I/F CABLE

6-8 GHz BAND ODU

! WARNINGTurn off power of IDU before disconnecting cable.

11-38 GHz BAND ODU

CLASS 1LASER PRODUCT

IDU FOR1+1 SYSTEM

IDU FOR1+0 SYSTEM

Page 10: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S03950 SAFETY INFORMATION

-3-

Do not disconnect IF cable between the IDUand the ODU in operation condition, to avoiddamaging the IDU and the ODU.

The -43 V DC power is superimposed on thecenter conductor of the IF cable between theIDU and the ODU. Connecting a testequipment directly to this terminal maydamage it and touching the coaxial cable coremay cause electrical shock.

Be careful that top surface of IDU is hot.

In a system using the OPT INTFC module, donot stare at the laser beam or look at it directlywith optical instruments. Otherwise, it mayhurt your eyes (Does not apply to Pasolink+

PDH).

WARNING!

Turn off power at IDUbefore disconnecting cable.

! WARNINGTurn off power of IDU before disconnecting cable.

! WARNING-43V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWERBEFORE DISCONNECTING

I/F CABLE

! CAUTION

HOT SURFACEAvoid contact

CLASS 1LASER PRODUCT

Page 11: Pasolink Plus

SAFETY INFORMATION ROI-S03950

-4-4 Pages

(This page is intentionally left blank.)

Page 12: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S03261-056E ABBREVIATIONS011212

-1-

ABBREVIATIONS

The following abbreviations are used in the manual for the PASOLINK +/-S equipment.

ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION

A

A-D Analogue to Digital

AGC Automatic Gain Control

AIS Alarm Indication Signal

ALC Automatic Level Control

ALM Alarm

ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown

AM Amplitude Modulation

AMI Alternate Mark Inversion

AMP Amplifier

ANS Answer

ANT Antenna

APC Automatic Phase Control

ARSR Arrester

ASC Analog Service Channel

ASK Amplitude Shift Keying

ATPC Automatic Transmitter Power Control

ATT Attenuator

AU Administrative Unit

AUX Auxiliary

B

B8ZS Bipolar with 8 Zeros Substitution

BAL Balance

Page 13: Pasolink Plus

ABBREVIATIONS ROI-S03261

-2-

BBE Background Block Error

BER Bit Error Rate

BNC Bayonet Navy Connector

BPF Band Pass Filter

BR Branching

B-B Back to Back

B-U Bipolar to Unipolar

C

CARR Carrier

CBL Cable

CH Channel

CISPR International Special Committee on Radio Interference

CKT Circuit

CLK Clock

CLSTR Cluster

CMI Coded Mark Inversion

COM Common

COMB Combiner

CONN Connection

CONT Control

CONV Converter

CPU Central Processing Unit

CTRL Control

CW Carrier Wave

D

D/A Digital/Analogue

D-A Digital to Analogue

DC Direct Current

ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION

Page 14: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S03261 ABBREVIATIONS

-3-

DCK Drop Clock

DDT Drop Data

DEC Decision

DECOD Decoder

DEM Demodulator

DEMUX Demultiplexer

DFP Drop Frame Pulse

DI Data Input

DIFF Differential

DMR Digital Microwave Radio

DNU Don’t use for Synchronization

DO Data Output

DPU Digital Processor Unit

DSC Digital Service Channel

DTE Data Terminal Equipment

DUP Duplexer

E

E/O Electrical/Optical

E-BER Excessive-Bit Error Rate

EMC Electro Magnetic Compatibility

EMI Electro Magnetic Interference

ENCOD Encoder

EOW Engineering Orderwire

EP Earthing Point

EP Equipment Priority

EPS Endless Phase Shifter

EQL Equalizer

ERR Error

ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION

Page 15: Pasolink Plus

ABBREVIATIONS ROI-S03261

-4-

ES Errored Seconds

ESD Electro Static Discharge

ESP Electro Static Protection

EXT External

F

FEC Forward Error Correction

FET Field-Effect Transistor

FG Frame Ground

FIL Filter

FREQ Frequency

FRM Frame

G

G Ground

GND Ground

H

H High

HDB-3 High Density Bipolar-3

HG High Grade

HK House Keeping

HL Hitless

HPA Higher order Path Adaptation

HPT Higher order Path Termination

HS Hot-standby

HYB Hybrid

I

I/O Input/Output

ICK Insert Clock

ID Identification

ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION

Page 16: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S03261 ABBREVIATIONS

-5-

IDT Insert Data

IDU Indoor Unit

IF Intermediate Frequency

IFP Insert Frame Pulse

IN Input

INH Inhibit

INT Internal

INTFC Interface

INV Invalid

ITU International Telecommunication Union

L

L Low

LA Local Access

LAN Local Area Network

LB Loop Back

LCD Liquid Crystal Display

LCT Local Craft Terminal

LED Light Emitting Diode

LEV Level

LO Local

LOF Loss of Frame

LOM Loss of Multiframe

LOP Loss of Pointer

LOS Loss of Signal

LPF Low Pass Filter

LPT Lower order Path Termination

M

MAC Media Access Control

ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION

Page 17: Pasolink Plus

ABBREVIATIONS ROI-S03261

-6-

MAINT Maintenance

MD Modulator Demodulator

MIX Mixer

MLC Multi-Level Coding

MOD Modulator

MODEM Modulator-Demodulator

MON Monitor

MSA Multiplex Section Adaptation

MST Multiplex Section Termination

MPX Multiplexer

MS-AIS Multiplex Section Alarm Indication Signal

MSOH Multiplex Section Overhead

MS-RDI Multiplex Section Remote Defect Indication

MTPC Manual Transmitter Power Control

MUX Multiplexer

N

NC Normal Closed

NDM Normal Disconnected Mode

NE Network Element

NF Noise Figure

NM Network Manager

NMS Network Management System

NO Normal Open

NORM Normal

NRZ Nonreturn to Zero

O

OC-1 Optical Carrier-1

O/E Optical/Electrical

ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION

Page 18: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S03261 ABBREVIATIONS

-7-

ODU Outdoor Unit

OFS Out of Frame Second

OH Overhead

OPR Operation

OPT Optical

OUT Output

OW Orderwire

P

PC Personal Computer

PCM Pulse Code Modulation

PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy

PH Phase

PJE Pointer Justification Event

PLL Phase-Locked Loop

PLM Payload Mismatch

PLS Pulse

PM Performance Monitor

PNMS Pasolink Network Management System

PNMT Pasolink Network Management Terminal

POH Path Overhead

PRC Primary Reference Clock

PS Power Supply

P/S Parallel/Serial

PSK Phase Shift Keying

PTR Pointer

PWR Power

Q

QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation

ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION

Page 19: Pasolink Plus

ABBREVIATIONS ROI-S03261

-8-

QL Quality

Q’TY Quantity

R

RCVD Received

RDI Remote Defect Indication

REC Rectifier

REQ’D Required

RF Radio Frequency

RFCOH Radio Frame Complementary Overhead

RL Relay

RMT Remote

RS Reed Solomon

RSOH Regenerator Section Overhead

RST Regenerator Section Termination

RSL Received Signal Level

RX Receive

S

S/P Serial/Parallel

S-P Serial-to-Parallel

SBIF Serial Bus Interface

SC Service Channel

SCRB Scramble

SD Signal Degrade

SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

SEC SDH Equipment Clock

SEL Selector

SEL V Safety Extra-Low Voltage

SES Severely Errored Seconds

ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION

Page 20: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S03261 ABBREVIATIONS

-9-

SEP Separation

SG Signal Ground

SHG Super High Grade

SMU Station Management Unit

SOH Section Overhead

SONET Synchronous Optical Network

SSM Synchronization Status Message

SSU Synchronization Supply Unit

SSU-L SSU Local

SSU-T SSU Transit

STM Synchronous Transport Module

STR Straight

SV Supervisory

SW Switch

SYNC Synchronizer

SYNTH Synthesizer

SYS System

T

TCA Threshold Crossing Alert

TERM Terminal

TIM Trace Indication Mismatch

TRANS Transformer

TRP Transmitter-Receiver Equipment

TTL Transistor-Transistor Logic

TU Tributary Unit

TUG Tributary Unit Group

TX Transmit

ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION

Page 21: Pasolink Plus

ABBREVIATIONS ROI-S03261

-10-10 pages

U

U Unit

UAS Unavailable Second

UNBAL Unbalance

UNEQ Unequipped

UNK Unknown

U-B Unipolar to Bipolar

V

VC Virtual Container

VCO Voltage Controlled Oscillator

VF Voice Frequency

V/H Vertical/Horizontal

VOL Volume

Vo-p Volt zero (0) to Peak

W

WG Waveguide

WS Wayside

ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION

Page 22: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04051-052E CONTENTS020326

CL-1

6-38 GHz 17/34 MBPDH DIGITAL MICROWAVE RADIO SYSTEM

PASOLINK (PDH/1+1 SYSTEM)

DESCRIPTION

CONTENTS

TITLE PAGE

1. GENERAL ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1-1

2. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-12.1 System Configuration •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-12.2 System Performance ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-92.3 RF Channel Plan •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-142.4 Alarm and Control•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-152.4.1 Alarm Indication and Reporting •••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-152.4.2 Performance Monitoring/Metering Data Reporting•••• 2-232.4.3 Automatic Transmitter Power Control •••••••••••••••••••• 2-232.4.4 Loopback Control •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-272.4.5 Network Management (Optional) ••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-282.5 Protection Switching •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-292.5.1 Hot-standby System ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-292.5.2 Switchover Control •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-302.6 Power Supply•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-31

3. SUBSYSTEM DESCRIPTION •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-1INDOOR UNIT •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-1

3.1 Composition •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-13.2 Functional Operation ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-33.2.1 Modulator Section••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-93.2.2 Demodulator Section ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-9

+

Page 23: Pasolink Plus

CONTENTS ROI-S04051

CL-22 pages

TITLE PAGE

OUTDOOR UNIT ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-9

3.3 Composition •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-93.4 Functional Operation •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-113.4.1 Transmitter Section•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-113.4.2 Receiver Section•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-11

Page 24: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04051 GENERAL

1-1

1. GENERAL

This section provides descriptive information on the 6/7/8/11/13/15/18/23/26/38 GHz 17/34 MB digital microwave radio system for theplesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH).

The ( ) GHz 17/34 MB digital microwave radio system provides atransmission capacity of eight or sixteen 2.048 MB signal. It operates inthe ( ) GHz radio frequency band with the 16 quadrature amplitudemodulation (QAM) method. Included herein are system description andsubsystem description.

Page 25: Pasolink Plus

GENERAL ROI-S04051

1-22 pages

(This page is intentionally left blank.)

Page 26: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04051 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

2-1

2. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

The system description outlines the system configuration, systemperformance, RF channel plan, alarm and control, protection switching,and power supply.

2.1 System Configuration

The system consists of the Modulator-Demodulator (Indoor Unit (IDU)),TRP-( )G-1AA Transmitter-Receiver (Outdoor Unit (ODU)), Hybrid andthe antenna (see Fig. 2-1 and Table 2-1). The IDU types are as follows:

• MDP-17MB4T-2A: 2MB × 8, Fixed bit rate type• MDP-34MB4T-2A: 2MB × 16, Fixed bit rate type• MDP-34MB4T-2B: 2MB × 8/16, Bit rate free type

As illustrated in Fig. 2-2, the ( ) GHz 17/34 MB microwave radio system isa 1-hop (point-to-point) system between two terminal stations, and isconfigured in the hot-standby (HS) system.

Fig. 2-1 Outline of IDUs and ODUs (1/3)

ALM/AUX CALLRESET

IDU

STATUS

+

R SWEOW

PASOLINKNE1 NE2 V11

PNMSLAN

ALM

TX

MAINT

SEL VFUSE (7.5A)

PWRIF IN/OUT

PWR +−

WARNING-43V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWERBEFORE DISCONNECTING

I/F CABLE

!

SEL VFUSE (7.5A)

PWRIF IN/OUT

PWR +−WARNING-43V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWERBEFORE DISCONNECTING

I/F CABLE

!

ODURX

G8538 MD UNIT

G8540 SW UNIT

G8538 MD UNIT

1

2

PNMT LCT EOW1 EOW2

CH1-CH8 IN/OUT

SC IN/OUT

ALM

LAN DSC/WS

ALM/AUX CALLRESET

IDU

STATUS

+

R SWEOW

PASOLINK

LAN CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

NE1 NE2 V11PNMS

LAN

ALM

TX

MAINT

SEL VFUSE (7.5A)

PWRIF IN/OUT

PWR +−

WARNING-43V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWERBEFORE DISCONNECTING

I/F CABLE

!

SEL VFUSE (7.5A)

PWRIF IN/OUT

PWR +−WARNING-43V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWERBEFORE DISCONNECTING

I/F CABLE

!

ODURX

G8538 MD UNIT

G8540 SW UNIT

G8538 MD UNIT

1

2

PNMT LCT EOW1 EOW2

CH1-CH8 IN/OUT

SC IN/OUT

ALM

LAN DSC/WS

2 MB × 8 BIT RATE FREE TYPE (EQUIPPED WITH 10BASE-T) MDP-17MB4T-2A

2 MB × 8 FIXED BIT RATE FREE TYPE MDP-17MB4T-2A

Page 27: Pasolink Plus

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ROI-S04051

2-2

Fig. 2-1 Outline of IDUs and ODUs (2/3)

ALM/AUX CALLRESET

IDU

STATUS

+

R SWEOW

PASOLINK

LAN CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

NE1 NE2 V11PNMS

LAN

ALM

TX

MAINT

SEL VFUSE (7.5A)

PWRIF IN/OUT

PWR +−

WARNING-43V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWERBEFORE DISCONNECTING

I/F CABLE

!

SEL VFUSE (7.5A)

PWRIF IN/OUT

PWR +−WARNING-43V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWERBEFORE DISCONNECTING

I/F CABLE

!

ODURX

G8538 MD UNIT

G8540 SW UNIT

G8538 MD UNIT

1

2

PNMT LCT EOW1 EOW2

CH1-CH8 IN/OUT

SC IN/OUT

CH9-CH16 WS IN/OUT

ALM

LAN DSC/WS

ALM/AUX CALLRESET

IDU

STATUS

+

R SWEOW

PASOLINKNE1 NE2 V11

PNMSLAN

ALM

TX

MAINT

SEL VFUSE (7.5A)

PWRIF IN/OUT

PWR +−

WARNING-43V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWERBEFORE DISCONNECTING

I/F CABLE

!

SEL VFUSE (7.5A)

PWRIF IN/OUT

PWR +−WARNING-43V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWERBEFORE DISCONNECTING

I/F CABLE

!

ODURX

G8538 MD UNIT

G8540 SW UNIT

G8538 MD UNIT

1

2

PNMT LCT EOW1 EOW2

CH1-CH8 IN/OUT

SC IN/OUT

CH9-CH16 WS IN/OUT

ALM

LAN DSC/WS

2 MB × 16 FIXED BIT RATE TYPE MDP-34MB4T-2A2 MB × 16 BIT RATE FREE TYPE MDP-34MB4T-2B

2 MB × 8/16 FIXED BIT RATE TYPE (EQUIPPED WITH 10BASE-T) MDP-34MB4T-2A2 MB × 8/16 BIT RATE FREE TYPE (EQUIPPED WITH 10BASE-T) MDP-34MB4T-2B

Page 28: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04051 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

2-3

Fig. 2-1 Outline of IDUs and ODUs (3/3)

IFL FG RX LEVMON

11-38 GHz BAND ODU

6/7/8 GHz BAND ODU

Page 29: Pasolink Plus

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ROI-S04051

2-4

(This page is intentionally left blank.)

Page 30: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04051 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

2-5/6

Fig. 2-2 Digital Microwave Radio System – Hot-standby System Block Diagram

ANTCONTCTRLDC-DC CONVDSCIDUINTFC

: Antenna: Control: Control: DC-DC Converter: Digital Service Channel: Indoor Unit (Modulator-Demodulator): Interface

LANLCTLOMODEMODUOW

: Local Area Network: Local Craft Terminal: Local Oscillator: Modulator Demodulator: Outdoor Unit (Transmitter-Receiver): Orderwire

PNMSPNMTRF CKTSELSYNTHVFWS

: Pasolink Network Management System: Pasolink Network Management Terminal: Radio Frequency Circuit: Selector: Synthesizer: Voice Frequency: Wayside

SYNTH(LO)

SYNTH(LO)

SYNTH(LO)

ODU (No.1 CH)IDU

RF

CONT

2 MBIN/OUT

LCT

DC-DCCONV

MODEM

DC-DCCONV

CKT

OWIN/OUT

ODU (No.1 CH)

RF

CONT

DC-DCCONV

CKT

OWIN/OUT

ODU (No.2 CH)

RF

CONT

DC-DCCONV

CKT

OWIN/OUT

ODU (No.2 CH)

RF

CONT

CKT

OWIN/OUT

DC-DCCONV

DC-DCCONV

SYNTH(LO)

ODUINTFC

ODUINTFCMODEM

WS IN/OUT*

IDU

DC-DCCONV

MODEM

DC-DCCONV

ODUINTFC

ODUINTFC MODEM

Notes: * Applies to 2 MB × 16 system.

ANT ANT

10 BASE-TIN/OUT

V11 64 KB IN/OUT

CPU

10 BASE-T

SUBINTFC

2M INTFC

PNMS/PNMT

SEL

10 BASE-T IN/OUT

2 MBIN/OUT

LCT

WS IN/OUT*

10 BASE-TIN/OUT

V11 64 KB IN/OUT

CPU

10 BASE-T

SUBINTFC

2M INTFC

PNMS/PNMT

SEL

10 BASE-T IN/OUT

Page 31: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04051 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

2-7/8

HG: High Grade

Table 2-1 System Composition

Equipment

Quantity

2 MB × 8 System 2 MB × 16 System 2 MB × 8/16 System

6 GHz

7 GHz

8 GHz

11 GHz

13 GHz

15 GHz

18 GHz

23 GHz

26 GHz

38 GHz

6 GHz

7 GHz

8 GHz

11 GHz

13 GHz

15 GHz

18 GHz

23 GHz

26 GHz

38 GHz

6 GHz

7 GHz

8 GHz

11 GHz

13 GHz

15 GHz

18 GHz

23 GHz

26 GHz

38 GHz

MDP-17MB4T-2A(G8536A) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

MDP-34MB4T-2A(G8536B) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

MDP-34MB4T-2B(G8536C) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

TRP-6G-1AA (HG)(G8222[ ]) 2 2 2

TRP-7G-1AA (HG)(G8223[ ]) 2 2 2

TRP-8G-1AA (HG)(G8224[ ]) 2 2 2

TRP-11G-1AA (HG)(G8737A) 2 2 2

TRP-13G-1AA (HG)(G7965A) 2 2 2

TRP-15G-1AA (HG)(G8550A) 2 2 2

TRP-18G-1AA (HG)(G8381A) 2 2 2

TRP-23G-1AA (HG)(G7960A) 2 2 2

TRP-26G-1AA (HG)(G8516A) 2 2 2

TRP-38G-1AA (HG)(G8512A) 2 2 2

HYBRID 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

ANTENNA 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Page 32: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04051 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

2-9

2.2 System Performance

The system performance characteristics of the ( ) GHz 17/34 MB digitalmicrowave radio system are listed in Table 2-2.

Table 2-2 System Performance (Typical Value)

A. IDU

Transmission Signal 2.048 Mbps ± 50 ppm

Transmission Capacity 2.048 Mbps × 8/2.048 MB × 16

Modulation 16 QAM

Demodulation Coherent detection

Forward Error Correction (FEC) Reed Solomon (RS)

Data Interface Electrical

BB Loopback Near-end/Far-end

IF Loopback Local only

INTERFACE

(1) Main Data Signal

Bit Rate 2.048 Mbps ± 50 ppm

Level Meets ITU-T G.703 specifications

Code Format High density bipolar (HDB) 3

Impedance 75 ohms, unbalanced or 120 ohms, balanced

(2) Wayside (WS)(2 MB × 16 system only/optional)

1 channel

Bit Rate 2.048 Mbps ±50 ppm (2 MB × 1)

Input/Output Level 2.37 Vo-p (75 ohms) or 3.0 Vo-p (120 ohms)

Code Format HDB3

Impedance 75 ohms, unbalanced or 120 ohms, balanced

(3) Digital Service Channel (DSC)* Eiether can be selected.

Type V.11 Async. standard V.11 contra/co-directional (Selectable) (optional)

Bit Rate 9.6 kbps 64 kbps (optional)

Page 33: Pasolink Plus

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ROI-S04051

2-10

Note: * The DSC, VF, CLSTR ALM and LAN DSC can be used threechannels maximum. Setting (provisioning) is performed by LCT.

Impedance 100 ohms, balanced 100 ohms, balanced (optional)

(4) Voice Frequency (VF)*

Circuit 4 wire

Frequency band 0.3 to 3.4 kHz

Level −6 dBm (nominal)

Impedance 600 ohms, balanced

(5) Cluster Alarms*

Input Photo-cuplers

Output Form-B dry contact relays

(6) 10BASE-T (Optional)

Main Data Signal 10 Base-T × 4 CH

Data rate 2 Mbps

WS or DSC(One either can be used)

10 Base-T × 1 CH

LAN WS 10 Base-T

Data rate 2 Mbps

LAN DSC* 10 Base-T

Data rate 64 kbps

(7) House Keeping Alarms/Control

Input 6 photo-coupler

Output 4 Form-C dry contact relays

(8) Network Management

Network ManagementSystem (NMS) Protocol

Simple network management protocol (SNMP)

Interface 10 Base-T or V.11

Table 2-2 System Performance (Typical Value) (Cont’d)

Page 34: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04051 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

2-11/12

Table 2-2 System Performance (Typical Value) (Cont’d)

B. ODU

Frequency Band 6 GHz 7 GHz 8 GHz 11 GHz 13 GHz 15 GHz 18 GHz 23 GHz 26 GHz 38 GHz

Frequency Range 5.9 to 8.5 GHz 10.7 to 11.7 GHz 12.75 to 13.25 GHz 14.2 to 15.35 GHz 17.7 to 19.7 GHz 21.2 to 23.6 GHz 24.25 to 27.0 GHz 37.0 to 40.0 GHz

TX Output Power +26.0 dBm +26.0 dBm +26.0 dBm +21.5 dBm +18.5 dBm +17.5 dBm +20.0 dBm +20.0 dBm +18.0 dBm +14.5 dBm

Frequency Stability ± 10 ppm ± 10 ppm ± 10 ppm ± 10 ppm ± 10 ppm ± 10 ppm ± 10 ppm ± 10 ppm ± 10 ppm ± 10 ppm

Receiver Threshold

BER 10-6

• 2 MB × 8:• 2 MB × 16:

−84.5 dBm−81.5 dBm

−84.5 dBm−81.5 dBm

−84.5 dBm−81.5 dBm

−83.5 dBm−80.5 dBm

−83.5 dBm−80.5 dBm

−84.0 dBm−81.0 dBm

−84.0 dBm−81.0 dBm

−83.5 dBm−80.5 dBm

−83.0 dBm−80.0 dBm

−82.0 dBm−79.0 dBm

BER 10-3

• 2 MB × 8:• 2 MB × 16:

−85.5dBm−82.5 dBm

−85.5 dBm−82.5 dBm

−85.5 dBm−82.5 dBm

−84.5 dBm−81.5 dBm

−84.5 dBm−81.5 dBm

−85.0 dBm−82.0 dBm

−85.0 dBm−82.0 dBm

−84.5 dBm−81.5 dBm

−84.0 dBm−81.0 dBm

−83.0 dBm−80.0 dBm

System Gain

BER 10-6

• 2 MB × 8:• 2 MB × 16:

110.5 dB107.5 dB

110.5 dB107.5 dB

110.5 dB107.5 dB

105.0 dB102.0 dB

102.0 dB99.0 dB

101.5 dB98.5 dB

104.0 dB101.0 dB

103.5 dB100.5 dB

101.0 dB98.0 dB

96.5 dB93.5 dB

BER 10-3

• 2 MB × 8:• 2 MB × 16:

111.5 dB108.5 dB

111.5 dB108.5 dB

111.5 dB108.5 dB

106.0 dB103.0 dB

103.0 dB100.0 dB

102.5 dB99.5 dB

105.0 dB102.0 dB

104.5 dB101.5 dB

102.0 dB99.0 dB

97.5 dB94.5 dB

ATPC/MTPC Range −25 to 0 dB

Additional Attenuationfor Span Equalization 5 dB

Page 35: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04051 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

2-13

Table 2-2 System Performance (Cont’d) (Typical Value)

C. OVERALL

IDU-ODU Interconnection Cable Single coaxial cable, 50 ohms impedance

Interconnection Cable (Type and Maximum Cable Length)

• 150 m (5D-FB coaxial cable or equivalent)• 300 m (8D-FB coaxial cable or equivalent)• 350 m (10D-FB coaxial cable or equivalent)• 450 m (12D-FB coaxial cable or equivalent)

Primary Voltage (SafetyExtra-Low Voltage (SEL V))

• −48 V DC (−36 to −60 V) or +48 V DC (+36 to +60 V)

• −24 V DC (−20 to −60 V) or+24 V DC (+20 to +60 V) Optional

Power Consumption (IDU + ODU)• 6-8 GHz Band• 11-13 GHz Band

130 W or less110 W or less

Dimension

IDU 482 mm (W) × 133 mm (H) × 300 mm (D)

ODU• 6-8 GHz• 11-38 GHz

260 mm (W) × 410 mm (H) × 190 mm (D)240 mm (W) × 243 mm (H) × 124 mm (D)

Weight

IDU Approx. 12 kg (Including optional module)

ODU• 6-8 GHz• 11-38 GHz

Approx. 10 kgApprox. 5 kg

Temperature Range

Guaranteed Operation

IDU −5°C to +50°C

ODU −33°C to +50°C

Workable Operation

IDU −10°C to +55°C

ODU −40°C to +55°C

Transport and Storage

IDU −40°C to +70°C

ODU −40°C to +70°C

Page 36: Pasolink Plus

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ROI-S04051

2-14

2.3 RF Channel Plan

Radio frequencies for Pasolink+ 6 to 38 GHz are as follows:

• 6-8 GHz Band : 5.9 to 8.5 GHz

• 11 GHz Band : 10.7 to 11.7 GHz

• 13 GHz Band : 12.75 to 13.25 GHz

• 15 GHz Band : 14.2 to 15.35 GHz

• 18 GHz Band : 17.7 to 19.7 GHz

• 23 GHz Band : 21.2 to 23.6 GHz

• 26 GHz Band : 24.25 to 27.0 GHz

• 38 GHz Band : 37.0 to 40.0 GHz

The actual TX frequency of the ODU should be within the TX radiofrequency band of the ODU and is entered using the local craft terminal(LCT). The corresponding RX frequency is automatically set after the TXfrequency is entered. For 6/7/8 GHz band ODU, the frequency settingshould be the same as that written on the ODU label. For 11-38 GHz bandODU, transmitting frequency should be entered between “Start” frequency+ 21 MHz and “Stop” frequency − 21 MHz displayed on LCT.

The frequency spacing between adjacent channels should be keptaccording to the following frequency.• 2 MB × 8 system : 7 MHz• 2 MB × 16 system : 14 MHz

For details, refer to Appendix in Description.

Relative Humidity Less than 90% at 50°C (Non-condensing)

Altitude Up to 4,000 m

Table 2-2 System Performance (Cont’d) (Typical Value)

Page 37: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04051 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

2-15

2.4 Alarm and Control

The alarm and control system is shown in Fig. 2-3. The functions of thealarm and control circuit are as follows:

• Alarm indication and reporting

• Performance monitoring/metering data reporting

• Automatic transmitter power control

• Loopback control

• Network Management (Optional)

2.4.1 Alarm Indication and Reporting

Alarm indication and reporting functions are provided with the IDU.Summary alarm indicators using LED’s are provided for the ODU andIDU, separately. ODU alarms detected by the alarm detection circuit inthe ODU are sent to the CTRL module in the IDU. This causes the ODUalarm indicator on the IDU front panel to turn on. Similarly, any IDUrelated alarms that are detected will cause the IDU alarm indicator on theIDU front panel to turn on. External reporting of alarms is also providedthrough closed relay contacts accessible via the front panel interface (seeTable 2-3).

Page 38: Pasolink Plus

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ROI-S04051

2-16

(This page is intentionally left blank.)

Page 39: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04051 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

2-17/18

Fig. 2-3 Alarm and Control Block Diagram

9 (COM)

25 (COM)13 (NO)

RL8

RL1

RL2

RL3

RL4

RL5

RL6

RL7

24 (NO)

23 (NC)11 (COM)

21 (NC)

12 (NC)

MODEM (No.2)DATA IN

DATA OUT

RL11

RL9

RL10

CONT

TX PWR ALM

TX INPUT ALM

RX LEVEL ALM

APC ALM

RF CKT (No.2)

ODUIDU

No.2 LOF

No.2 BER ALM

No.2 DEM ALM

No.2 MOD ALM

INTFC TX ALMINTFC RX ALM

MAIN INTFC 2M LOSS

MAIN INTFC

SUB INTFC

PNMT

CTRL

No.1 PS ALM

SEL V

PWR

ODU

IDULCTEOW1EOW2

NE1NE2

PNMS V11PNMS LAN

22 (NO)

4 (COM)

20 (COM)8 (NO)

6 (NO)

5 (NC)18 (COM)

16 (NC)

7 (NC)

17 (NO)

15 (COM)3 (NO)

2 (NC)

22 (COM)9 (NO)

21 (NO)

20 (NC)7 (COM)

8 (NC)

PS ALM

MAINT

CPU ALM

ODUINTFC(No.1)

ODU ALM 1/ODU ALM 2**

IDU ALM 1/ODU ALM 2**

BER ALM 1/BER ALM 2**

MAIN INTFC 2M LOSS**

HK2 ALM**

HK1 ALM**

MAINT

INTERFACETERMINAL

ALM

INTERFACETERMINALALM/AUX

SUB INTFC 2M LOSS

MODEM (No.1)

No.1 LOF

No.1 BER ALM

No.1 DEM ALM

No.1 MOD ALM

DC-DCCONV (No.1)SEL V

DC-DCCONV (No.2)

No.2 PS ALM

ODUINTFC(No.2)

No.1 ODU(SAME AS BELOW)

RF IN/OUT (No.2)

RF IN/OUT (No.1)

No.2 ODU

INTFC

LANDSC/WS*

Notes: 1. The wayside function applies only to 2M × 16 system.2. * Optional.3. ** These are factory settings (default settings). These

alarm items can be set by the LCT.

25 (COM)12 (NO)

24 (NO)

23 (NC)10 (COM)

11 (NC)HK4 ALM**

HK3 ALM**

CTRL

No.2 MD CPU ALM

No.1 MD CPU ALM

Page 40: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04051 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

2-19/20

Table 2-3 Alarm Indication and Reporting

Equipment Unit Alarm Initiated Alarm Initiating Module Alarm Condition LED Indication on

IDU Remote Alarm Reporting

IDU MD UNIT (No.1/No.2)

MOD ALM MODEM Alarm detected of TX side of MD UNIT No.1 IDU ALM orNo.2 IDU ALM

IDU ALM 1 or IDU ALM 2MOD ALM 1 or MOD ALM 2

DEM ALM MODEM Input IF signal is lost No.1 IDU ALM orNo.2 IDU ALM

IDU ALM 1 or IDU ALM 2DEM ALM 1 or DEM ALM 2

MD CPU ALM MODEM Communication between modules failure No.1 IDU ALM orNo.2 IDU ALM IDU ALM 1 or IDU ALM 2

LOF MODEM Frame synchronization is lost No.1 IDU ALM orNo.2 IDU ALM

IDU ALM 1 or IDU ALM 2LOF 1 or LOF2

BER ALM MODEM BER is worse than preset value (1 × 10-3 to 1 × 10-6, selectable) No.1 IDU ALM orNo.2 IDU ALM

IDU ALM 1 or IDU ALM 2BER ALM 1 or BER ALM 2

MODEM MODEM MODEM module failureNo.1 IDU ALM orNo.2 IDU ALM

IDU ALM 1 or IDU ALM 2MOD ALM 1 or MOD ALM 2DEM ALM 1 or DEM ALM 2LOF 1 or LOF 2BER ALM 1 or BER ALM 2

POWER SUPPLY DC-DC CONV DC-DC CONV module failure No.1 IDU ALM orNo.2 IDU ALM

IDU ALM 1 or IDU ALM 2PS ALM 1 or PS ALM 2

SW UNIT INTFC TX ALM CTRL TX side interface clock is lost No.1 IDU ALM and No.2 IDU ALM

IDU ALM 1 and IDU ALM 2TX INTFC ALM

INTFC RX ALM CTRL RX side interface clock or bipolar output signal is lost No.1 IDU ALM and No.2 IDU ALM

IDU ALM 1 and IDU ALM 2RX INTFC ALM

MAIN INTFC 2M LOSS CTRL Main channel (CH1-CH16) input data is lost No.1 IDU ALM and No.2 IDU ALM

IDU ALM 1 and IDU ALM 2MAIN INTFC 2M LOS

MAIN INTFC CTRL Main interface module failure No.1 IDU ALM and No.2 IDU ALM

IDU ALM 1 and IDU ALM 2INTFC TX ALM, INTFC RX ALM or MAIN INTFC 2M LOS

SUB INTFC 2M LOSS (optional)

LAN DSC/WS WS input data is lost No.1 IDU ALM and No.2 IDU ALM

IDU ALM 1 and IDU ALM 2SUB INTFC 2M LOS

SUB INTFC (optional) LAN DSC/WS Sub interface module failure (including SUB INTFC 2M LOSS alarm) No.1 IDU ALM and No.2 IDU ALM

IDU ALM 1 and IDU ALM 2SUB INTFC ALM

Page 41: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04051 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

2-21/22

ODU(No.1/No.2)

TX PWR ALM RF CKT Transmit RF power increases/decreases approx. 3 dB from normal No.1 ODU ALM orNo.2 ODU ALM

ODU ALM 1 or ODU ALM 2TX PWR ALM 1 or 2

TX INPUT ALM RF CKT TX IF input signal from IDU is lost No.1 ODU ALM orNo.2 ODU ALM

ODU ALM 1 or ODU ALM 2TX INPUT ALM 1 or 2

RX LEVEL ALM RF CKT Receiver input level decreases below squelch level No.1 ODU ALM orNo.2 ODU ALM

ODU ALM 1 or ODU ALM 2RX LEVEL ALM 1 or 2

APC ALM SYNTH/RF CKT Local oscillator is unlocked No.1 ODU ALM orNo.2 ODU ALM

ODU ALM 1 or ODU ALM 2APC ALM 1 or 2

CABLE ALM Communication between the ODU and IDU is lost No.1 ODU ALM orNo.2 ODU ALM

ODU ALM 1 or ODU ALM 2COMM ALM 1 or ODU ALM 2

IDU/ODU MAINT The equipment is in maintenance mode. In this mode, the following control operations can be performed.

• ATPC manual control • Loopback• TX mute • RF frequency• TX/RX SW manual • CW

MAINT MAINT

Table 2-3 Alarm Indication and Reporting (Cont’d)

Equipment Unit Alarm Initiated Alarm Initiating Module Alarm Condition LED Indication on

IDU Remote Alarm Reporting

Page 42: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04051 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

2-23

2.4.2 Performance Monitoring/Metering Data Reporting

To monitor the transmission quality, the equipment is provided with theperformance monitoring and the metering functions. The CTRL modulepolls the different modules and gathers PM/Metering information. A “*”mark displayed in the PM results screen indicates that the value is illegal.A “#” mark is displayed if the PM results are obtained while the equipmentis in maintenance mode. When the equipment clock setting is changed orthe power is turned on/off, the PM value is judged to be invalid. Themonitoring items are as follows:

• Out of Frame Second (OFS)

• Background Block Error (BBE)

• Errored Seconds (ES)

• Severely Errored Seconds (SES)

• Unavailable Second (UAS)

• TX POWER

• RX LEVEL

• ODU PS MON

• Bit Error Rate (BER)

2.4.3 Automatic Transmitter Power Control

The automatic transmit power control (ATPC) function automaticallyvaries the TX output power according to path conditions. In the 6 to 38GHz band, fading exerts heavy influences on propagation, causing thereceive signal level at the opposite station to vary. The ATPC functionoperates by controlling the transmit output power of the opposite stationaccording to the variation of the received signal level at the local station.ATPC provides the following advantages:

• Improvement in up fading characteristics• Improvement in residual BER characteristics• Reduction of interference to intra system• Reduction of interference to inter system

Page 43: Pasolink Plus

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ROI-S04051

2-24

A functional block diagram of the ATPC operation is shown in Fig.2-4. ATPC improves the BER characteristics under adverse changesin climatic conditions and reduces the possibility of interference. Toimplement ATPC, the receiving level (RX IN LEV) is detected bythe receiver (RX) and passed on to the CPU on the CTRL circuit ofthe MODEM module. The CPU then determines whether thetransmit output power needs to be controlled. This is based on thetransmit output power, the minimum and maximum values of theoutput control range, and the receiving threshold level that werepriorly specified using the LCT or PNMT.

A control signal (POWER CONT), whose function is to maintainthe RX signal by lowering or raising the TX output power of theopposite station, is generated by the MODEM module through theCPU circuit. This control signal is based on the result ofcomparison between the current receiver input level and the presetreceiving threshold level. This control signal is sent to the oppositestation to control its transmit output power.

At the opposite station, this control signal is detected by theMODEM module. The MODEM module, in accordance with thiscontrol signal, produces a control that will either raise, lower ormaintain the current TX output power. This control is based on thetransmit output power and the minimum/maximum values of theoutput control range specified using the LCT or PNMT.

Fig. 2-4 ATPC, Functional BLock Diagram

TX

TX

RX

RX

POWER CONT

REMOTE

RX IN LEV

REMOTECTRL CTRL

TRANSMITTING STATION RECEIVING STATION

MODEM

MODEMMODEM

MODEM

Page 44: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04051 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

2-25

The ATPC Control System of Pasolink+ transmits the information on thereceiving level to the opposite station and controls the transmission levelof its own station in accordance with the receiving level of the oppositestation. Transmission level control can be used not only for setting thesame operation (ATPC-ATPC) between own station and opposite stationbut also for operation in combination of stations with different operation(MTPC-ATPC, ATPC-MTPC) between own station and opposite station.The station set in MTPC mode is not controlled by the information fromopposite station but is fixed in its transmitting output level.

Even if the station is set in the MTPC mode, the opposite station is likelyto be set in the ATPC mode. Therefore, setting the RX Threshold(Receiving threshold level) is required for controlling the transmissionlevel of the opposite station. Between the stations that are respectively setin the MTPC mode, however, the setting is disabled.

The following is an example of operation between stations set in MTPC-ATPC mode.

The transmitting level of station B is controlled so that the receiving levelof station A in the above figure reaches the RX Threshold set level (−50dBm) set in station A. This method is used in station A for reducing thelevel of interference to other route. As station A is set in the MTPC mode,the transmitting level is kept unchanged.

Then an example of using MTPC-ATPC is shown below. As shown in thefigure, in the master station communicating with many substations, wavesgather from substations possibly causing interferences. Therefore,substations must be set in the ATPC mode to minimize the diffraction(interference) to other routes while reducing the receiving levels fromindividual substations to the minimum. In substations, there is littlepossibility of occurring interferences; therefore, the master station is set inthe MTPC mode to permit transmission at a constant level.

STATION A STATION B

PASOLINK+PASOLINK+

ATPCMTPC(RX Threshold: −50 dBm)

Page 45: Pasolink Plus

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ROI-S04051

2-26

(MTPC)(ATPC)

SUBSTATION 2(ATPC)

SUBSTATION 5

(ATPC)SUBSTATION 1

(ATPC)SUBSTATION 3

(ATPC)SUBSTATION 4

MASTERSTATION

B

A

BA : Diffraction to other route.

Page 46: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04051 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

2-27

2.4.4 Loopback Control

The loopback function is provided for checking the system quality duringmaintenance and/or to quickly isolate a fault location. The control isperformed by the LCT, the PNMT or the PNMS.

The following types of loopback are provided:

• Main 2M near-end loopback (Main 2M LB1) at the CTRL module((a) in Fig. 2-5).

• Main 2M far-end loopback (Main 2M LB2) at the CTRL module ((b)in Fig. 2-5).

• IF loopback (IF-LB) at the MODEM module ((c) in Fig. 2-5).

Notes: 1. While the IF loopback is in execution, monitoring of theopposite and the subsequent stations are disabled on thePNMS and PNMT.

2. Loopback control will interrupt the radio linkconnection.

Fig. 2-5 Loopback Location

CTRL

LCT/PNMT Note: Reverse direction is the same as above.

U/BCONVDEMRX

B/UCONVMODTX

(b)

IDUODU

RECEIVING END

TX

RX

MOD

DEM

B/UCONV

U/BCONV

PDH/SDHANALYZER

PDH/SDHANALYZER

(a) (c)

ODUIDU

TRANSMITTING END

MODEM MODEMCTRL CTRL

SPEEDCONV

SPEEDCONV

SPEEDCONV

SPEEDCONV

Page 47: Pasolink Plus

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ROI-S04051

2-28

2.4.5 Network Management (Optional)

The Network Management System (NMS) configuration is shown in Fig.2-6. The pasolink network management system (PNMS) is connected tothe PNMS V.11/LAN connector of the IDU located at the designatedmaintenance center while the pasolink network management terminal(PNMT) is connected to the PNMT connector on the IDU of remotestations. The PNMT/PNMS provides monitoring and control of the actualmicrowave link status and its associated Pasolink equipment. Statusinformation form and control signals to remote stations are transmittedusing one of the SC channels.

Note: This SC channel is multiplexed on the main signal forsubsequent transmission to the opposite station. If the IFloopback is executed the SC channels of the station undermaintenance will also be looped back, thereby making itimpossible to monitor or control the opposite and thesubsequent stations

For detailed information, refer to the related PNMS or PNMT manual.

Fig. 2-6 Network Management System

PNMS PNMT

PASOLINK

PNMS: Pasolink Network Management SystemPNMT : Pasolink Network Management Terminal

SC

PNMTPNMS V.11/LANCONNECTOR CONNECTOR

+PASOLINK +

Page 48: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04051 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

2-29

2.5 Protection Switching

Protection switching is provided in the Hot-standby system.

2.5.1 Hot-standby System

Protection switching in this system is performed by the TX switches* onthe No. 1 and No. 2 channel ODUs at the transmitting end and by the HLSW** on the CTRL module of the IDU at the receiving end.

Notes: 1. * Transmit switching is actually accomplished by muting theoutput of either No.1 or No.2 channel ODUs, using a controlsignal from the IDU. For the description of switching withTX switch, refer to para. 2.5.2 (a)

2. ** For the switching configuration of HL SW on the CTRLmodule, refer to para. 2.5.2 (b).

3. The switching of Main 2Mbps data is performed by hitlessswitching, and the WS and DSC signals are not so.

When both the No. 1 and No. 2 channels are in normal operatingcondition, the 2 Mbps data signal from the associated MUX equipment aresent to the No. 1 and No. 2 channel ODUs through the No. 1 and No. 2channel IDUs. Here, either of the No. 1 or No. 2 channel signal is selectedat the TX switch on the ODU and fed to the receiving end. At the receivingend, the output data signal of the No. 1 and No. 2 channels MODEM enterthe HL SW on the CTRL module. The data signal selected by HL SW isfed to associated MUX equipment.

When the modulator alarm is detected in the MODEM or when the TX IFinput alarm, TX power alarm or APC alarm is detected in the ODU, thealarm signal is sent to the switch control logic circuit on the CTRLmodule. The switch control logic circuit produces a TX switch controlsignal for selecting the ODU that is in the normal condition. When theODU receives the TX switching control signal, the output of the ODU thatis currently active (on-line) is muted and the output of the other ODU isun-muted. The switching condition is shown on the LCT and by the TX1and TX2 STAUS indicators on the IDU.

At the receiving end, when the Reed Solomon error alarm is detected inthe MODEM of the No. 1 channel, the alarm signal is sent to the switchcontrol logic circuit on the CTRL module. The switch control logic circuitproduces a HL SW control signal that would cause the HL SW to select thedata signal from No.2 channel. The switching condition is shown on theLCT and by the RX1 and RX2 STATUS indicators on the IDU.

Page 49: Pasolink Plus

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ROI-S04051

2-30

2.5.2 Switchover Control

The following explains the protection switching function in the HSsystem.

(a) TX SwitchingTX switching in HS system is accomplished by muting the TXoutput power of either No.1 or No.2 channel ODU. Two types ofTX switch controls are provided: automatic switching that isinitiated by detection of a failure in the transmit section of theMODEM or ODU, and manual switching that is initiated by theoperator using the LCT. TX switching, either initiated manually orautomatically, may cause a short interruption of the data.Automatic and manual TX switching have the followingoperational characteristics: • Switching Priority: 1. Manual switching

2. Automatic switching• Switching condition: Non-priority (Non-homing)

Note:In non-homing mode, the channel currently selected remainsselected even if the alarm in the previously selected channelis normalized.

(b) RX Switching RX switching in HS system is performed by the HL SW on theCTRL module.Two types of RX switch controls are provided: automaticswitching that is initiated by the quality deterioration of thereceived signal and manual switching that is initiated by theoperator using the LCT.The switching priority and switching conditions for automatic andmanual swathing are identical to those of TX switching. However,the switching condition is only valid under automatic switchingcontrol. This is because automatic switching is implemented byhardware logic and manual switching is implemented by softwarelogic. That is, automatic switching and manual switching arecompletely independent and separate operations. Thus, when theoperator reverts to automatic switching after performing manualswitching, the channel that was selected when RX switching wasunder automatic control will be re-selected by the HL SW.In automatic switching mode, the system quality is considered tobe deteriorated when the detected BER exceeds the internallypreset value (1 × 10-8 to 1 × 10-10).

Page 50: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04051 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

2-31

2.6 Power Supply

The power supply system block diagram is shown in Fig. 2-7. The DC-DCCONV module on the IDU produces regulated +5.3 and +3.6 V DC powerfrom ±48/±24 V DC input power for the component modules in the IDU.Also, this module produces a regulated −43 V DC power from the −48 VDC input power for the ODU.

The power to the ODU is supplied through the coaxial cable which is alsoused for the IF and other signals. The DC-DC CONV module of the ODUproduces +7/+9/+10 and −15 V DC power for the component modulesfrom the −43 V DC power supplied from the IDU.

Fig. 2-7 Power Supply System Block Diagram

DC

ODU INTFC

INPUT

(1/3)(2/4)

DC-DC CONV

IF IN

IDU

DC-DCCONV

SEP/COMBFIL

IF OUT

SEL V IF OUT

+5.3 V+3.6 V

−43 V

IF INSEP/

COMBFIL

+7/+9/+10V

DCINPUT

(1/3)(2/4) (SAME AS ABOVE) (SAME AS ABOVE)

No. 2 CH

+5.3 V+3.6 V

SEL V

ODU (No.2 CH)No. 1 CH

−48 V/+48 V/−24 V/+24 V/

ODU (No.1 CH)

Note: The common (CTRL and LAN DSC/WS) modules are supplied DCpower from the DC-DC CONV module of both channel No. 1 andNo. 2 to protect the system.

MODEM, CTRL, LAN DSC/WS

-15V−48 V/+48 V/−24 V/+24 V/

Page 51: Pasolink Plus

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ROI-S04051

2-3232 pages

(This page is intentionally left blank.)

Page 52: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04051 SUBSYSTEM DESCRIPTION

3-1

3. SUBSYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Described herein are composition and functional operation of each moduleof the IDU and the ODU.

INDOOR UNIT

3.1 Composition

The following equipment is composed of appropriate plug-in units aslisted in Table 3-1. The component unit/modules are arranged on a shelfas shown in Fig. 3-1.

• MDP-17MB4T-2A: 2 MB × 8, Fixed bit rate type• MDP-34MB4T-2A: 2 MB × 16, Fixed bit rate type• MDP-34MB4T-2B: 2 MB × 8/16, Bit rate free type

Note: *Location numbers are referred to those in Fig. 3-1.

Table 3-1 IDU Component Module

Location No.* Unit Name

MDP-17MB4T-2A(2 MB × 8)

MDP-34MB4T-2A(2 MB × 16)

MDP-34MB4T-2B

(2 MB × 8/16)Remarks

1

G8540A SW UNIT

G8540B SW UNIT

G8540C SW UNIT Equipped with 10BASE-TG8540D SW UNIT

2

G8538A MD UNIT For DC −48 V/DC +48 V power inputG8538B MD UNIT

G8538C MD UNIT

G8538D MD UNIT For DC −20 to −60 V/DC +20 to +60 V power input

G8538E MD UNIT

G8538F MD UNIT

Page 53: Pasolink Plus

SUBSYSTEM DESCRIPTION ROI-S04051

3-2

Fig. 3-1 IDU Component Unit/Module Arrangement

16 QAM

FRONT BOARD

(TOP LAYER/BOTTOM LAYER)TOP VIEW

TOP VIEW(MEDIUM LAYER)

ODUINTFC

2

FRONT

CTRL

FRONT

DC-DCCONV

FRONT BOARD

2

LANDSC/WS*(SUB INTERFACE)

2

1

Notes:1. Location numbers are referred to those in Table 3-1.2. * For details, refer to Note 7 of Fig. 3-3 in Chapter 3.

MODEM

Page 54: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04051 SUBSYSTEM DESCRIPTION

3-3

3.2 Functional Operation

A block and level diagram of the IDU is shown in Fig. 3-2. Functionaloperations of the IDU are described separately for the modulator sectionand demodulator section.

Page 55: Pasolink Plus

SUBSYSTEM DESCRIPTION ROI-S04051

3-4

(This page is intentionally left blank.)

Page 56: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04051 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

3-5/6

Fig. 3-2 IDU Block and Level Diagram

PNMT

10BASE-TIN/OUT

2MB DATAIN/OUT

10BASE-T*(CH1-4)

2M INTFC(CH1-16)

LCTEOW1EOW2NE1NE2PNMS V11PNMS LAN

VF IN/OUT

CLSTR ALM

SW UNIT

V11 9.6 KBIN/OUT

POSITION 1 2 3 4

DATA SPEED/FREQUENCY

2.048 Mbps 340 MHz 140 MHz 9.6 Kbps Async.

LEVEL 2.37 Vo-p (HDB 3) –2 to –29 dBm*** –15 to –55 dBm*** V 11IMPEDANCE 75 ohm,

unbalanced or 120 ohm, balanced

50 ohms, unbalanced100 ohms

POSITION 5 6 7 8

DATA SPEED/FREQUENCY

0.3 to 3.4 kHz Input P.COutput RL

64 Kbps 10 BASE-T

LEVEL –6 dBm ALM: LOOP V 11 IMPEDANCE 600 ohms,

balanced 100 ohms

POSITION 9 10 11 12

DATA SPEED/FREQUENCY

2.048 Mbps RS-232C RS-232C 0.3 to 3.4 kHz

LEVEL 2.37 Vo-p (HDB 3) –6 dBmIMPEDANCE 75 ohm,

unbalanced or 120 ohm, balanced

100 ohms, unbalanced

POSITION 13 14 15 16

DATA SPEED/FREQUENCY

0.3 to 3.4 kHz RS-485 RS-485 V11

LEVEL –6 dBm IMPEDANCE 100 ohms,

unbalanced100 ohms 100 ohms 100 ohms

POSITION 17

DATA SPEED/FREQUENCY

10 BASE-T

LEVEL IMPEDANCE

8

SEL

V11 64 KBIN/OUT

WSIN/OUT**

10BASE-TIN/OUT

8

SCASSIGN-MENT

SEL

CTRL/CPU

LAN DSC/WS*

16 QAMMODEM

ODUINTFC1

5

9

2

10

6

7

3

416 QAMMODEM

ODUINTFC

No.1IF IN/OUT

No.2IF IN/OUT

Notes: 1. * Optional2. ** Applies only to 2 MB × 16 system.3. *** The level is automatically controlled to compensate the cable loss between

IDU and ODU.4. The recommended cable, 8D-FB, has 15 dB (at 140 MHz)/26 dB (at 340 MHz)

loss at the maximum length of 300 meters (1,000 feet).5. For details of SC Assignment and Sub Interface, refer to Fig. 3-3.

MD UNIT (No.1)

MD UNIT (No.2)

CTRL

11121314151617

Page 57: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04051 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

3-7/8

Fig. 3-3 Details of SC Assignment and Sub Interface

V11 9.6KB/64KB-1

LAN DSC/WS(SUB INTERFACE)

Note 7

VF

CLSTR ALM-1CLSTR ALM-2

Note 1

10BASE-TNote 4

8

5

7

4

EOW DSC1

V11 9.6KB/64KB-2

66

S/P,P/S

Note 27

9WSNote 3

4

SC AssignmentDSC2DSC3DSC4

Note 5

Default

WS

Note 6

CTRL(SC SECTION)

Notes: 1. V11 signal is two channels maximum.2. When the V11 (64K) is used in the Sub Interface, SC Assignment of V11 (9.6K)

can not be set. However, if it is set as contra-directional by direction setting, datacommunication of V11 (9.6K) async, can be performed.

3. Applies only to 2 MB × 16 system.4. In the 2 MB × 16 system, WS or DSC transmission can be selected. However,

only DSC transmission can be performed in 2 MB × 8 system. Also, in case DSCtransmission is selected, after selecting 10BASE-T by the Sub Interface item,DSC2-4 of SC Assignment should be selected.

5. Selection of WS or 10BASE-T is performed in the Provisioning (Sub Interface).6. Input/Output of CLSTR ALM is two channels7. The LAN DSC/WS is classfied into following table.

LAN DSC/WS 10BASE-T V11-64KB WS (E1)

G8531A

G8531B

G8531C

G8531D

G8531E

G8531F

G8531G

4

4

7

7

Page 58: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04051 SUBSYSTEM DESCRIPTION

3-9

3.2.1 Modulator SectionThe 2.048 Mbps signal received from the terminal equipment enters theinterface section of the CTRL module. The interface section extracts theclock component from the data signal that is in high density bipolar-3(HDB-3) format. Then the code is converted from HDB-3 to non-return-to-zero (NRZ) with this clock signal and fed to MODEM module.

The input signal from the interface section is speed-converted for radioframe and time slots are inserted. Then additional bits for the digitalservice channel (DSC), wayside(WS), orderwire(OW) and supervisory(SV) signals are inserted in the time slots. Moreover, error correction FECbits are inserted, and coded, then, string-converted to obtain the data signalrequired for modulation. The data signal converted will modulate the 340MHz IF signal, and is fed to the ODU INTFC module.

The 340 MHz IF signal received from the MODEM module is multiplexedwith the ODU power supply and control signal, etc. at the MPX section,then fed to ODU after the deterioration due to the cable between IDU-ODU is corrected.

3.2.2 Demodulator Section

At the MPX in the ODU INTFC module, the control signal is separatedfrom the 140 MHz IF signal received from the ODU. 140 MHz IF signalis fed to MODEM module after the deterioration due to cable lengthbetween ODU-IDU and the signal level are corrected.

The 140 MHz IF signal from ODU INTFC module is demodulated at thedemodulator section, then regenerated to the baseband signal composed ofthe radio frame. After the detection and correction of errors that occurredat the radio link are performed in the error correction section, radio framesynchronization is established. Then the DSC,WS, OW and SV signalsinserted in the transmitter side are extracted from the time slots. Then timeslots for additional bits are removed, and fed to the interface section.

The NRZ-coded data signal is converted to the original HDB-coded 2.048Mbps data signal and fed to terminal equipment.

OUTDOOR UNIT

The composition and functional operation of the ODU are described in thischapter.

3.3 Composition

The component modules are arranged on the shelf as shown in Fig. 3-4.

Page 59: Pasolink Plus

SUBSYSTEM DESCRIPTION ROI-S04051

3-10

Fig. 3-4 ODU Component Module Arrangement (1/2)

SYNTH

DC-DC

DUP

RF CKT

(CTRL AND SYNTH REMOVED)

CTRL

CONV

6/7/8 GHz ODU

11/13/15 GHz ODU

IFLFG RX LEVMON

RF CKT

CONT

DC-DCCONV

SYNTH

INSIDE OF ODU

Page 60: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04051 SUBSYSTEM DESCRIPTION

3-11

Fig. 3-4 ODU Component Module Arrangement (2/2)

3.4 Functional Operation

A block and level diagram of the ODU is shown in Fig. 3-5. Functionaloperations of the ODU are described separately for the transmitter sectionand receiver section.

3.4.1 Transmitter Section

A 340 MHz IF signal which is composed of the DC components, andcontrol signal, etc., from the IDU is separated by the multiplexer (MPX)circuit. The 340 MHz IF signal received from the IDU converts the RFsignal with a local signal generated by a synthesized local oscillator. ThisRF signal goes to antenna through the BPF which eliminates undesiredcomponents generated in the IF-RF conversion.

3.4.2 Receiver Section

First, an RF signal received through the antenna is amplified to therequired level by the RF amplifier. Afterward, an RF signal converts the140 MHz IF signal with a local signal generated by a synthesized localoscillator. The 140 MHz IF signal goes to the IDU through the MPXcircuit which combines the alarm/control signal, etc.

IFLFG RX LEVMON

INSIDE OF ODU

IF FG RX LEVMON

18/23/26/38 GHz ODU

RF CKT

CONT

DC-DCCONV

SYNTH

Page 61: Pasolink Plus

SUBSYSTEM DESCRIPTION ROI-S04051

3-1212 pages

Note: * When the standard receive signal level is received.

Fig. 3-5 ODU, Block and Level Diagram

RF CKT

12

DUP

SYNTH

RFIN/OUT

IF IN/OUT(TO/FROM IDU)

CONT

Position 1 2

NOMINALLEVEL

IF IN: −29 dBmIF OUT: −15 dBm*

RF OUT: +26 dBm (6/7/8 GHz)+21.5 dBm (11 GHz)+18.5 dBm (13 GHz)+17.5 dBm (15 GHz)+20 dBm (18/23 GHz)+18 dBm (26 GHz)+14.5 dBm (38 GHz)

RF IN: −30 dBmFREQUENCY IF IN: 340 MHz

IF OUT: 140 MHzAssigned Radio Frequency

IMPEDANCE 50 ohms 50 ohms

Page 62: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04077-052E APPENDIX011225

A-1

APPENDIXRADIO FREQUENCY PLAN FOR PASOLINK

This Appendix provides the radio frequencies (6 to 38 GHz) used by eachfrequency band as follows:

• 6 GHz Band Table A-1 (ITU-R F.383-6)• TX/RX frequency spacing : 252.04 MHz

• 6 GHz Band Table A-2 (ITU-R F.384-7)• TX/RX frequency spacing : 340 MHz

• 6 GHz Band Table A-3 (OIRT)• TX/RX frequency spacing : 266 MHz

• 6 GHz Band Table A-4 (MEXICO)• TX/RX frequency spacing : 252.04 MHz

• 7 GHz Band Table A-5 (UK)• TX/RX frequency spacing : 245 MHz

• 7 GHz Band Table A-6 (ITU-R F.385-6)• TX/RX frequency spacing : 161 MHz

• 7 GHz Band Table A-7• TX/RX frequency spacing : 154 MHz

• 7 GHz Band Table A-8 (ITU-R 385-6 Annex 1)• TX/RX frequency spacing : 154 MHz

• 7 GHz Band Table A-9 (RUSSIAN)• TX/RX frequency spacing : 161 MHz

• 7 GHz Band Table A-10 (ITU-R F.385-6 Annex 3-1)• TX/RX frequency spacing : 196 MHz

• 7 GHz Band Table A-11 (ITU-R F.385-6 Annex 3-2)• TX/RX frequency spacing : 168 MHz

• 8 GHz Band Table A-12 (ITU-R F.386-6)• TX/RX frequency spacing : 151.614 MHz

• 8 GHz Band Table A-13 (ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 1)• TX/RX frequency spacing : 311.32 MHz

• 8 GHz Band Table A-14 (ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 2-1)• TX/RX frequency spacing : 294.44 MHz

• 8 GHz Band Table A-15 (ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 2-2)• TX/RX frequency spacing : 305.56 MHz

• 8 GHz Band Table A-16 (ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 3-1)• TX/RX frequency spacing : 119 MHz

+

Page 63: Pasolink Plus

APPENDIX ROI-S04077

A-2

• 8 GHz Band Table A-17 (ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 3-2)• TX/RX frequency spacing : 126 MHz

• 8 GHz Band Table A-18 (ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 4)• TX/RX frequency spacing : 266 MHz

• 8 GHz Band Table A-19 (NORWAY)• TX/RX frequency spacing : 154 MHz

• 11 GHz Band Table A-20 (ITU-R F.387-7)• TX/RX frequency spacing : 530 MHz

• 13 GHz Band Table A-21 (ITU-R F.497-6)• TX/RX frequency spacing : 266 MHz

• 15 GHz Band Table A-22 (ITU-R F.636-3)• TX/RX frequency spacing : 490 MHz

• 15 GHz Band Table A-23 (ITU-R F.636-3)• TX/RX frequency spacing : 420 MHz

• 15 GHz Band Table A-24 (CEPT/ERC/REC 12-07E)• TX/RX frequency spacing : 728 MHz

• 18 GHz Band Table A-25 (ITU-R F.595-6 Annex 3)• TX/RX frequency spacing : 1008 MHz

• 18 GHz Band Table A-26 (ITU-R F.595-6 Annex 4)• TX/RX frequency spacing : 1010 MHz

• 18 GHz Band Table A-27 (PORTARIA 1288)• TX/RX frequency spacing : 1560 MHz

• 18 GHz Band Table A-28 (ITU-R F.595-6 Annex 2)• TX/RX frequency spacing : 1560 MHz

• 23 GHz Band Table A-29 (ITU-R F.637-3 Annex 3&4)• TX/RX frequency spacing : 1008 MHz

• 23 GHz Band Table A-30 (ITU-R F.637-3 Annex 4)• TX/RX frequency spacing : 1200 MHz

• 23 GHz Band Table A-31 (ITU-R F.637-3 Annex 1) • TX/RX frequency spacing : 1232 MHz

• 23 GHz Band Table A-32 (PORTARIA 83) • TX/RX frequency spacing : 1232 MHz

• 26 GHz Band Table A-33 (ITU-R F.748-3 Annex 1)• TX/RX frequency spacing : 1008 MHz

• 26 GHz Band Table A-34 (ITU-R F.748-3 Annex 1)• TX/RX frequency spacing : 1123.5 MHz

• 38 GHz Band Table A-35 (ITU-R F.749-1 Annex 1)• TX/RX frequency spacing : 1260 MHz

• 38 GHz Band Table A-36 (ITU-R F.749-1 Annex 2)• TX/RX frequency spacing : 700 MHz

Page 64: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04077 APPENDIX

A-3

• 38 GHz Band Table A-37 (ANATEL)• TX/RX frequency spacing : 1260 MHz

Note: TX/RX frequency spacing : 252.04 MHz

Note: TX/RX frequency spacing : 340 MHz

Table A-1 6 GHz Band, Relationship of Sub-band and Radio Frequency ITU-R F.383-6

ODU Type Sub-Band TX Radio Frequency Band Remarks

G8222A/B

A 5930.375 to 5974.850 MHz

Lower BandB 5989.675 to 6034.150 MHz

C 6048.975 to 6093.450 MHz

D 6108.275 to 6152.750 MHz

A 6182.415 to 6226.890 MHz

Upper BandB 6241.715 to 6286.190 MHz

C 6301.015 to 6345.490 MHz

D 6360.315 to 6404.790 MHz

Table A-2 6 GHz Band, Relationship of Sub-band and Radio Frequency ITU-R F.384-7

ODU Type Sub-Band TX Radio Frequency Band Remarks

G8222C/D

A 6440 to 6500 MHz

Lower BandB 6520 to 6580 MHz

C 6600 to 6660 MHz

D 6680 to 6740 MHz

A 6780 to 6840 MHz

Upper BandB 6860 to 6920 MHz

C 6940 to 7000 MHz

D 7020 to 7080 MHz

Page 65: Pasolink Plus

APPENDIX ROI-S04077

A-4

Note: TX/RX frequency spacing : 266 MHz

Note: TX/RX frequency spacing : 252.04 MHz

Table A-3 6 GHz Band, Relationship of Sub-band and Radio Frequency OIRT

ODU Type Sub-Band TX Radio Frequency Band Remarks

G8222E/F

A 5675 to 5717 MHz

Lower BandB 5731 to 5773 MHz

C 5787 to 5829 MHz

D 5843 to 5885 MHz

A 5941 to 5983 MHz

Upper BandB 5997 to 6039 MHz

C 6053 to 6095 MHz

D 6109 to 6151 MHz

Table A-4 6 GHz Band, Relationship of Sub-band and Radio Frequency MEXICO

ODU Type Sub-Band TX Radio Frequency Band Remarks

G8222G/H

A 5935.317 to 5984.733 MHz

Lower BandB 5994.616 to 6044.033 MHz

C 6053.916 to 6103.333 MHz

D 6113.216 to 6162.633 MHz

A 6187.357 to 6236.773 MHz

Upper BandB 6246.656 to 6296.073 MHz

C 6305.840 to 6355.373 MHz

D 6365.256 to 6414.673 MHz

Page 66: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04077 APPENDIX

A-5

Note: TX/RX frequency spacing : 245 MHz

Note: TX/RX frequency spacing : 161 MHz

Table A-5 7 GHz Band, Relationship of Sub-band and Radio Frequency UK

ODU Type Sub-Band TX Radio Frequency Band Remarks

G8223A/B

A 7431.5 to 7484.0 MHz

Lower BandB 7487.5 to 7540.0 MHz

C 7543.5 to 7596.0 MHz

D 7599.5 to 7652.0 MHz

A 7676.5 to 7729.0 MHz

Upper BandB 7732.5 to 7785.0 MHz

C 7788.5 to 7841.0 MHz

D 7844.5 to 7897.0 MHz

Table A-6 7 GHz Band, Relationship of Sub-band and Radio Frequency ITU-R F.385-6

ODU Type Sub-Band TX Radio Frequency Band Remarks

G8223C/D

A 7124.5 to 7191.0 MHzLower Band

B 7194.5 to 7261.0 MHz

A 7285.5 to 7352.0 MHzUpper Band

B 7355.5 to 7422.0 MHz

G8223E/F

A 7424.5 to 7491.0 MHzLower Band

B 7494.5 to 7561.0 MHz

A 7585.5 to 7652.0 MHzUpper Band

B 7655.5 to 7722.0 MHz

G8223G/H

A 7249.5 to 7316.0 MHzLower Band

B 7319.5 to 7386.0 MHz

A 7410.5 to 7477.0 MHzUpper Band

B 7480.5 to 7547.0 MHz

G8223J/K

A 7549.5 to 7616.0 MHzLower Band

B 7619.5 to 7686.0 MHz

A 7710.5 to 7777.0 MHzUpper Band

B 7780.5 to 7847.0 MHz

Page 67: Pasolink Plus

APPENDIX ROI-S04077

A-6

Note: TX/RX frequency spacing : 154 MHz

Note: TX/RX frequency spacing : 154 MHz

Note: TX/RX frequency spacing : 161 MHz

Table A-7 7 GHz Band, Relationship of Sub-band and Radio Frequency

ODU Type Sub-Band TX Radio Frequency Band Remarks

G8223L/M

A 7128 to 7184 MHzLower Band

B 7198 to 7254 MHz

A 7282 to 7338 MHzUpper Band

B 7352 to 7408 MHz

Table A-8 7 GHz Band, Relationship of Sub-band and Radio Frequency ITU-R 385-6 Annex 1

ODU Type Sub-Band TX Radio Frequency Band Remarks

G8223N/P

A 7428 to 7484 MHzLower Band

B 7498 to 7554 MHz

A 7582 to 7638 MHzUpper Band

B 7652 to 7708 MHz

Table A-9 7 GHz Band, Relationship of Sub-band and Radio Frequency RUSSIAN

ODU Type Sub-Band TX Radio Frequency Band Remarks

G8223R/S

A 7253.00 to 7322.75 MHzLower Band

B 7323.00 to 7392.75 MHz

A 7414.00 to 7483.75 MHzUpper Band

B 7484.00 to 7553.75 MHz

Page 68: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04077 APPENDIX

A-7

Note: TX/RX frequency spacing : 196 MHz

Note: TX/RX frequency spacing : 168 MHz

Note: TX/RX frequency spacing : 151.614 MHz

Table A-10 7 GHz Band, Relationship of Sub-band andRadio Frequency ITU-R F.385-6 Annex 3-1

ODU Type Sub-Band TX Radio Frequency Band Remarks

G8223T/U

A 7107 to 7163 MHzLower Band

B 7177 to 7233 MHz

A 7303 to 7359 MHzUpper Band

B 7373 to 7429 MHz

Table A-11 7 GHz Band, Relationship of Sub-band andRadio Frequency ITU-R F.385-6 Annex 3-2

ODU Type Sub-Band TX Radio Frequency Band Remarks

G8223V/W

A 7443 to 7499 MHzLower Band

B 7513 to 7569 MHz

A 7611 to 7667 MHzUpper Band

B 7681 to 7737 MHz

Table A-12 8 GHz Band, Relationship of Sub-band and Radio Frequency ITU-R F.386-6

ODU Type Sub-Band TX Radio Frequency Band Remarks

G8224A/B

A 8204.217 to 8268.358 MHzLower Band

B 8274.189 to 8338.330 MHz

A 8355.831 to 8419.972 MHzUpper Band

B 8425.803 to 8489.944 MHz

Page 69: Pasolink Plus

APPENDIX ROI-S04077

A-8

Note: TX/RX frequency spacing : 311.32 MHz

Note: TX/RX frequency spacing : 294.44 MHz

Table A-13 8 GHz Band, Relationship of Sub-band andRadio Frequency ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 1

ODU Type Sub-Band TX Radio Frequency Band Remarks

G8224C/D

A 7732.875 to 7777.350 MHz

Lower BandB 7792.175 to 7836.650 MHz

C 7851.475 to 7895.950 MHz

D 7910.775 to 7955.250 MHz

A 8044.195 to 8088.670 MHz

Upper BandB 8103.495 to 8147.970 MHz

C 8162.795 to 8207.270 MHz

D 8222.095 to 8266.570 MHz

Table A-14 8 GHz Band, Relationship of Sub-band andRadio Frequency ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 2-1

ODU Type Sub-Band TX Radio Frequency Band Remarks

G8224E/F

A 7745.37 to 7786.11 MHz

Lower BandB 7806.48 to 7847.22 MHz

C 7867.59 to 7908.33 MHz

D 7928.70 to 7969.44 MHz

A 8050.93 to 8091.67 MHz

Upper BandB 8112.04 to 8152.78 MHz

C 8173.15 to 8213.89 MHz

D 8234.26 to 8275.00 MHz

Page 70: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04077 APPENDIX

A-9

Note: TX/RX frequency spacing : 305.56 MHz

Note: TX/RX frequency spacing : 119 MHz

Note: TX/RX frequency spacing : 126 MHz

Table A-15 8 GHz Band, Relationship of Sub-band andRadio Frequency ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 2-2

ODU Type Sub-Band TX Radio Frequency Band Remarks

G8224G/H

A 7730.56 to 7771.30 MHz

Lower BandB 7791.67 to 7832.41 MHz

C 7852.78 to 7893.52 MHz

D 7913.89 to 7954.63 MHz

A 8025.00 to 8065.74 MHz

Upper BandB 8086.11 to 8126.85 MHz

C 8147.22 to 8187.96 MHz

D 8208.33 to 8249.07 MHz

Table A-16 8 GHz Band, Relationship of Sub-band andRadio Frequency ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 3-1

ODU Type Sub-Band TX Radio Frequency Band Remarks

G8224J/K

A 8286 to 8321 MHzLower Band

B 8328 to 8363 MHz

A 8405 to 8440 MHzUpper Band

B 8447 to 8482 MHz

Table A-17 8 GHz Band, Relationship of Sub-band andRadio Frequency ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 3-2

ODU Type Sub-Band TX Radio Frequency Band Remarks

G8224L/M

A 8282.5 to 8321.0 MHzLower Band

B 8324.5 to 8363.0 MHz

A 8408.5 to 8447.0 MHzUpper Band

B 8450.5 to 8489.0 MHz

Page 71: Pasolink Plus

APPENDIX ROI-S04077

A-10

Note: TX/RX frequency spacing : 266 MHz

Note: TX/RX frequency spacing : 154 MHz

Note: TX/RX frequency spacing : 530 MHz

Table A-18 8 GHz Band, Relationship of Sub-band andRadio Frequency ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 4

ODU Type Sub-Band TX Radio Frequency Band Remarks

G8224N/P

A 7908.5 to 7961.0 MHz

Lower BandB 7964.5 to 8017.0 MHz

C 8020.5 to 8073.0 MHz

D 8076.5 to 8129.0 MHz

A 8174.5 to 8227.0 MHz

Upper BandB 8230.5 to 8283.0 MHz

C 8286.5 to 8339.0 MHz

D 8342.5 to 8395.0 MHz

Table A-19 8 GHz Band, Relationship of Sub-band and Radio Frequency NORWAY

ODU Type Sub-Band TX Radio Frequency Band Remarks

G8224R/S

A 8203 to 8259 MHzLower Band

B 8273 to 8329 MHz

A 8357 to 8413 MHzUpper Band

B 8427 to 8483 MHz

Table A-20 11 GHz Band, Relationship of Sub-band and Radio Frequency ITU-R F.387-7

ODU Type Sub-Band TX Radio Frequency Band Remarks

G8737A

A For 10715 to 10795 MHz

Lower BandB For 10835 to 10915 MHz

C For 10955 to 11035 MHz

D For 11075 to 11155 MHz

A For 11245 to 11325 MHz

Upper BandB For 11365 to 11445 MHz

C For 11485 to 11565 MHz

D For 11605 to 11685 MHz

Page 72: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04077 APPENDIX

A-11

Note: TX/RX frequency spacing : 266 MHz

Note: TX/RX frequency spacing : 490 MHz

Table A-21 13 GHz Band, Relationship of Sub-band and Radio Frequency ITU-R F.497-6

ODU Type Sub-Band TX Radio Frequency Band Remarks

G7965A

A For 12754.5 to 12803.5 MHz

Lower Band

B For 12810.5 to 12859.5 MHz

C For 12866.5 to 12915.5 MHz

D For 12922.5 to 12971.5 MHz

E For 12894.5 to 12943.5 MHz

A For 13020.5 to 13069.5 MHz

Upper Band

B For 13076.5 to 13125.5 MHz

C For 13132.5 to 13181.5 MHz

D For 13188.5 to 13237.5 MHz

E For 13160.5 to 13209.5 MHz

Table A-22 15 GHz Band, Relationship of Sub-band and Radio Frequency ITU-R F.636-3

ODU Type Sub-Band TX Radio Frequency Band Remarks

G8550A

A For 14406.5 to 14515.0 MHz

Lower BandB For 14518.5 to 14627.0 MHz

C For 14630.5 to 14739.0 MHz

D For 14742.5 to 14851.0 MHz

A For 14896.5 to 15005.0 MHz

Upper BandB For 15008.5 to 15117.0 MHz

C For 15120.5 to 15229.0 MHz

D For 15232.5 to 15341.0 MHz

Page 73: Pasolink Plus

APPENDIX ROI-S04077

A-12

Note: TX/RX frequency spacing : 420 MHz

Note: TX/RX frequency spacing : 728 MHz

Note: TX/RX frequency spacing : 1008 MHz

Table A-23 15 GHz Band, Relationship of Sub-band and Radio Frequency ITU-R F.636-3

ODU Type Sub-Band TX Radio Frequency Band Remarks

G8550A

A For 14504.5 to 14613.0 MHz

Lower BandB For 14616.5 to 14725.0 MHz

C For 14728.5 to 14837.0 MHz

D For 14840.5 to 14921.0 MHz

A For 14924.5 to 15033.0 MHz

Upper BandB For 15036.5 to 15145.0 MHz

C For 15148.5 to 15257.0 MHz

D For 15260.5 to 15341.0 MHz

Table A-24 15 GHz Band, Relationship of Sub-band andRadio Frequency CEPT/ERC/REC 12-07E

ODU Type Sub-Band TX Radio Frequency Band Remarks

G8550AA 14504.5 to 14616.5 MHz Lower Band

A 15232.5 to 15344.5 MHz Upper Band

Table A-25 18 GHz Band, Relationship of Sub-band andRadio Frequency ITU-R F.595-6 Annex 3

ODU Type Sub-Band TX Radio Frequency Band Remarks

G8381A

A 17720.50 to 18035.50 MHz

Lower BandB 18035.50 to 18364.50 MHz

C 18364.50 to 18672.50 MHz

A 18728.50 to 19043.50 MHz

Upper BandB 19043.50 to 19372.50 MHz

C 19372.50 to 19680.50 MHz

Page 74: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04077 APPENDIX

A-13

Note: TX/RX frequency spacing : 1010 MHz

Note: TX/RX frequency spacing : 1560 MHz

Note: TX/RX frequency spacing : 1560 MHz

Note: TX/RX frequency spacing : 1008 MHz

Table A-26 18 GHz Band, Relationship of Sub-band andRadio Frequency ITU-R F.595-6 Annex 4

ODU Type Sub-Band TX Radio Frequency Band Remarks

G8381A

A 17706.25 to 18057.50 MHz

Lower BandB 18035.00 to 18387.50 MHz

C 18358.75 to 18688.75 MHz

A 18716.25 to 19067.50 MHz

Upper BandB 19045.00 to 19397.50 MHz

C 19368.75 to 19698.75 MHz

Table A-27 18 GHz Band, Relationship of Sub-band and Radio Frequency PORTARIA 1288

ODU Type Sub-Band TX Radio Frequency Band Remarks

G8381AA 17700.00 to 18140.00 MHz Lower Band

A 19260.00 to 19700.00 MHz Upper Band

Table A-28 18 GHz Band, Relationship of Sub-band andRadio Frequency ITU-R F.595-6 Annex 2

ODU Type Sub-Band TX Radio Frequency Band Remarks

G8381AA 17720.00 to 18120.00 MHz Lower Band

A 19280.00 to 19680.00 MHz Upper Band

Table A-29 23 GHz Band, Relationship of Sub-band andRadio Frequency ITU-R F.637-3 Annex 3&4

ODU Type Sub-Band TX Radio Frequency Band Remarks

G7960A

A 22002.75 to 22302.00 MHzLower Band

B 22274.00 to 22590.00 MHz

A 23010.75 to 23310.00 MHzUpper Band

B 23282.00 to 23598.00 MHz

Page 75: Pasolink Plus

APPENDIX ROI-S04077

A-14

Note: TX/RX frequency spacing : 1200 MHz

Note: TX/RX frequency spacing : 1232 MHz

Note: TX/RX frequency spacing : 1232 MHz

Table A-30 23 GHz Band, Relationship of Sub-band andRadio Frequency ITU-R F.637-3 Annex 4

ODU Type Sub-Band TX Radio Frequency Band Remarks

G7960A

A 21200.00 to 21600.00 MHz

Lower BandB 21598.75 to 22000.00 MHz

C 21998.75 to 22400.00 MHz

A 22400.00 to 22800.00 MHz

Upper BandB 22798.75 to 23200.00 MHz

C 23198.75 to 23600.00 MHz

Table A-31 23 GHz Band, Relationship of Sub-band andRadio Frequency ITU-R F.637-3 Annex 1

ODU Type Sub-Band TX Radio Frequency Band Remarks

G7960A

A 21224.00 to 21588.00 MHz

Lower BandB 21560.00 to 21953.75 MHz

C 21924.00 to 22345.75 MHz

A 22456.00 to 22820.00 MHz

Upper BandB 22792.00 to 23185.75 MHz

C 23156.00 to 23577.75 MHz

Table A-32 23 GHz Band, Relationship of Sub-band andRadio Frequency PORTARIA 83

ODU Type Sub-Band TX Radio Frequency Band Remarks

G7960A

B 21815.50 to 21927.50 MHzLower Band

C 21959.00 to 22358.00 MHz

B 23047.50 to 23159.50 MHzUpper Band

C 23191.00 to 23590.00 MHz

Page 76: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04077 APPENDIX

A-15

Note: TX/RX frequency spacing : 1008 MHz

Note: TX/RX frequency spacing : 1123.5 MHz

Note: TX/RX frequency spacing : 1260 MHz

Table A-33 26 GHz Band, Relationship of Sub-band andRadio Frequency ITU-R F.748-3 Annex 1

ODU Type Sub-Band TX Radio Frequency Band Remarks

G8516A

A 24549.88 to 24857.00 MHz

Lower BandB 24843.00 to 25151.00 MHz

C 25137.00 to 25444.13 MHz

A 25557.88 to 25865.00 MHz

Upper BandB 25851.00 to 26159.00 MHz

C 26145.00 to 26452.13 MHz

Table A-34 26 GHz Band, Relationship of Sub-band andRadio Frequency ITU-R F.748-3 Annex 1

ODU Type Sub-Band TX Radio Frequency Band Remarks

G8516A

A 25562.25 to 25816.00 MHzLower Band

B 25811.63 to 26054.88 MHz

A 26685.75 to 26939.50 MHzUpper Band

B 26935.13 to 27178.38 MHz

Table A-35 38 GHz Band, Relationship of Sub-band andRadio Frequency ITU-R F.749-1 Annex 1

ODU Type Sub-Band TX Radio Frequency Band Remarks

G8512A

A 37058.88 to 37436.00 MHz

Lower BandB 37425.50 to 37807.00 MHz

C 37800.00 to 38177.13 MHz

A 38318.88 to 38696.00 MHz

Upper BandB 38685.50 to 39067.00 MHz

C 39060.00 to 39437.13 MHz

Page 77: Pasolink Plus

APPENDIX ROI-S04077

A-1616 pages

Note: TX/RX frequency spacing : 700 MHz

Note: TX/RX frequency spacing : 1260 MHz

Table A-36 38 GHz Band, Relationship of Sub-band andRadio Frequency ITU-R F.749-1 Annex 2

ODU Type Sub-Band TX Radio Frequency Band Remarks

G8512A

A 38600.00 to 38950.00 MHzLower Band

B 38925.00 to 39250.00 MHz

A 39300.00 to 39650.00 MHzUpper Band

B 39625.00 to 39950.00 MHz

Table A-37 38 GHz Band, Relationship of Sub-band andRadio Frequency ANATEL

ODU Type Sub-Band TX Radio Frequency Band Remarks

G8512A

A 37004.00 to 37450.00 MHz

Lower BandB 37450.00 to 37786.00 MHz

C 37786.00 to 38234.00 MHz

A 38262.00 to 38710.00 MHz

Upper BandB 38710.00 to 39046.00 MHz

C 39046.00 to 39494.00 MHz

Page 78: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04052-052E CONTENTS020326

CL-1

6-38 GHz 17/34 MBPDH DIGITAL MICROWAVE RADIO SYSTEM

PASOLINK +

(PDH/1+1 SYSTEM)

OPERATION

CONTENTS

TITLE PAGE

1. GENERAL ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1-1

2. INTERFACE TERMINALS AND JACKS •••••••••••••• 2-1

3. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND TEST JACKS••• 3-13.1 IDU••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-13.2 ODU ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-5

4. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT IMPEDANCE AND LAN CABLE SELECTION•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 4-1

5. EQUIPMENT START-UP AND SHUT-DOWN••••••• 5-15.1 Start-up••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-15.2 Shut-down ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-2

6. SETTING AND MONITORING IN LCT ••••••••••••••••• 6-16.1 General ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-1

Page 79: Pasolink Plus

CONTENTS ROI-S04052

CL-22 pages

(This page is intentionally left blank.)

Page 80: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04052 GENERAL

1-1

1. GENERAL

This section provides operating instructions for the 6/7/8/11/13/15/18/23/26/38 GHz 17/34 MB digital microwave radio system.

This part describes the interface terminals and jacks, controls, indicators,test jacks, equipment start-up, and equipment shut-down. Setting andmonitoring using the LCT are required for local operation.

The firmware version described in this manual is 1.0.**.

Page 81: Pasolink Plus

GENERAL ROI-S04052

1-22 pages

(This page is intentionally left blank.)

Page 82: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04052 INTERFACE TERMINALS AND JACKS

2-1

2. INTERFACE TERMINALS AND JACKS

The interface terminals and jacks for interconnection with the associatedequipment are arranged as shown in Figs. 2-1 and 2-2, and are used asdescribed in Tables 2-1 and 2-2. Fig. 2-1 and Table 2-1 show the IndoorUnit (IDU) and Fig. 2-2 and Table 2-3 show the Outdoor Unit (ODU).

Fig. 2-1 IDU, Interface Terminals and Jacks

LCTPNMT

LAN

ALM

CH9-CH16 WS IN//OUT

ALM/AUXV11

NE1 NE2

SC IN/OUT

EOW1EOW2

IDU

CH1-CH8 IN/OUT

No.1 CHIF IN/OUT

No.1 CHSEL V

No.2 CHSEL V

No.2 CHIF IN/OUT PNMS

ALM/AUX CALLRESET

IDU

STATUS

+

R SWEOW

PASOLINK

LAN CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

NE1 NE2 V11PNMS

LAN

ALM

TX

MAINT

SEL VFUSE (7.5A)

PWRIF IN/OUT

PWR +−

WARNING-43V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWERBEFORE DISCONNECTING

I/F CABLE

!

SEL VFUSE (7.5A)

PWRIF IN/OUT

PWR +−WARNING-43V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWERBEFORE DISCONNECTING

I/F CABLE

!

ODURX

G8538 MD UNIT

G8540 SW UNIT

G8538 MD UNIT

1

2

PNMT LCT EOW1 EOW2

CH1-CH8 IN/OUT

SC IN/OUT

CH9-CH16 WS IN/OUT

ALM

LAN DSC/WS

LANCH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

LAN DSC/WS

Page 83: Pasolink Plus

INTERFACE TERMINALS AND JACKS ROI-S04052

2-2

Fig. 2-2 ODU, Interface Terminal

IFL FG RX LEVMON

11-38 GHz BAND ODU

FG

IF IN/OUT RF IN/OUT

(FRONT VIEW) (REAR VIEW)

(REAR VIEW) (BOTTOM VIEW)

FG

IF IN/OUT

RF IN/OUT

6/7/8 GHz BAND ODU

Page 84: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04052 INTERFACE TERMINALS AND JACKS

2-3

Table 2-1 Interface Terminals and Jacks for IDU

Terminal/Jack Description

IF IN/OUT TX IF signal output to ODU and RX IF signal input from ODU

(N-J Connector) Warning: 1. Do not connect other cables to this connector,because the – 43 V DC power is superimposedon it.

2. Do not touch the connector before turning offpower switch.

CH 1 - CH 8 IN/OUT(D-sub Connector, 37 Pins)

2.048 Mbps HDB-3 coded data input/output(CH 1 to CH 8)

Pins 4 (+) and 23 (−) Channel (CH) 8 input

Pins 6 (+) and 25 (−) CH7 input

Pins 8 (+) and 27 (−) CH6 input

Pins 10 (+) and 29 (−) CH5 input

Pins 12 (+) and 31 (−) CH4 input

Pins 14 (+) and 33 (−) CH3 input

Pins 16 (+) and 35 (−) CH2 input

Pins 18 (+) and 37 (−) CH1 input

Pins 3 (+) and 22 (−) CH8 output

Pins 5 (+) and 24 (−) CH7 output

Pins 7 (+) and 26 (−) CH6 output

Pins 9 (+) and 28 (−) CH5 output

Pins 11 (+) and 30 (−) CH4 output

Pins 13 (+) and 32 (−) CH3 output

Pins 15 (+) and 34 (−) CH2 output

Pins 17 (+) and 36 (−) CH1 output

Pin 19 Ground

CH 9 to CH 16 WS IN/OUT(D-sub Connector, 37 Pins)

2.048 Mbps HDB-3 coded data and wayside signal input/output

Pins 2 (+) and 21 (−) Wayside (WS) signal input

Pins 4 (+) and 23 (−) CH16 input

Page 85: Pasolink Plus

INTERFACE TERMINALS AND JACKS ROI-S04052

2-4

Pins 6 (+) and 25 (−) CH15 input

Pins 8 (+) and 27 (−) CH14 input

Pins 10 (+) and 29 (−) CH13 input

Pins 12 (+) and 31 (−) CH12 input

Pins 14 (+) and 33 (−) CH11 input

Pins 16 (+) and 35 (−) CH10 input

Pins 18 (+) and 37 (−) CH9 input

Pins 1 (+) and 20 (−) WS signal output

Pins 3 (+) and 22 (−) CH16 output

Pins 5 (+) and 24(−) CH15 output

Pins 7 (+) and 26(−) CH14 output

Pins 9 (+) and 28 (−) CH13 output

Pins 11 (+) and 30 (−) CH12 output

Pins 13 (+) and 32 (−) CH11 output

Pins 15 (+) and 34 (−) CH10 output

Pins 17 (+) and 36 (−) CH 9 output

Pin 19 Ground

PNMT(Modular Connector)

Pasolink network management terminal (PNMT) data input/output (RS-232C)

Pin B1 PNMT DCD

Pin B2 PNMT TXD

Pin B3 PNMT RXD

Pin B4 PNMT DSR

Pin B5 Ground

Pin B6 PNMT DTR

Pin B7 PNMT CTS

Pin B8 PNMT RTS

Table 2-1 Interface Terminals and Jacks for IDU (Cont’d)

Terminal/Jack Description

Page 86: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04052 INTERFACE TERMINALS AND JACKS

2-5

LCT(Modular Connector)

Local craft terminal (LCT) data input/output (RS-232C)

Pin D1 N.C

Pin D2 LCT TXD

Pin D3 LCT RXD

Pin D4 N.C

Pin D5 Ground

Pin D6 N.C

Pin D7 LCT CTS

Pin D8 LCT RTS

EOW1(Modular Connector)

Engineering orderwire (EOW)1 signal extension terminal for back-to-back connection between IDUs (VF)

Pin F1 EXT EOW1 input (+)

Pin F2 EXT EOW1 input (−)

Pin F3 EXT CALL1 input

Pin F4 EXT EOW1 output (+)

Pin F5 EXT EOW1 output (−)

Pin F6 Ground

Pin F7 EXT CALL1 output

Pin F8 Ground

EOW2(Modular Connector)

EOW2 signal extension terminal for back-to-back connection between IDUs (VF)

Pin J1 EXT EOW2 output (+)

Pin J2 EXT EOW2 output (−)

Pin J3 EXT CALL2 output

Pin J4 EXT EOW2 input (+)

Pin J5 EXT EOW2 input (−)

Pin J6 Ground

Table 2-1 Interface Terminals and Jacks for IDU (Cont’d)

Terminal/Jack Description

Page 87: Pasolink Plus

INTERFACE TERMINALS AND JACKS ROI-S04052

2-6

Pin J7 EXT CALL2 input

Pin J8 Ground

NE1(Modular Connector)

Pasolink network management system (PNMS) data input/output for back-to-back connection between IDUs (RS-485)

Pin A1 NE1 TXD+

Pin A2 NE1 TXD−

Pin A3 NE1 RXD+

Pin A4 NE1 CK+

Pin A5 NE1 CK−

Pin A6 NE1 RXD−

Pin A7 Ground

Pin A8 Ground

NE2(Modular Connector)

PNMS data input/output for back-to-back connection between IDUs (RS-485)

Pin C1 NE2 TXD+

Pin C2 NE2 TXD−

Pin C3 NE2 RXD+

Pin C4 N.C

Pin C5 N.C

Pin C6 NE2 RXD−

Pin C7 Ground

Pin C8 Ground

PNMS V11(Modular Connector)

PNMS data (V11) input/output

Pin E1 NMS V TX+

Pin E2 NMS V TX−

Pin E3 NMS V RX+

Pin E4 N.C

Table 2-1 Interface Terminals and Jacks for IDU (Cont’d)

Terminal/Jack Description

Page 88: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04052 INTERFACE TERMINALS AND JACKS

2-7

Pin E5 N.C

Pin E6 NMS V RX−

Pin E7 Ground

Pin E8 Ground

PNMS LAN(Modular Connector)

PNMS data (LAN) input/output

Pin H1 NMS T TX+

Pin H2 NMS T TX−

Pin H3 NMS T RX+

Pin H4 N.C

Pin H5 N.C

Pin H6 NMS T RX−

Pin H7 N.C

Pin H8 N.C

LAN CH1(Modular Connector)

Local area network (LAN) (CH1) signal input/output of 10BASE-T (cross/straight can be set by S7 on the Front Board (see chapter 4))STRAIGHT CROSS

Pin A1 LAN1 TX+ LAN1 RX+

Pin A2 LAN1 TX− LAN1 RX−

Pin A3 LAN1 RX+ LAN1 TX+

Pin A6 LAN1 RX− LAN1 TX−

LAN CH2(Modular Connector)

LAN (CH2) signal input/output of 10BASE-T (cross/straight can be set by S8 on the Front Board (see chapter 4))STRAIGHT CROSS

Pin B1 LAN2 TX+ LAN2 RX+

Pin B2 LAN2 TX− LAN2 RX−

Pin B3 LAN2 RX+ LAN2 TX+

Pin B6 LAN2 RX− LAN2 TX−

Table 2-1 Interface Terminals and Jacks for IDU (Cont’d)

Terminal/Jack Description

Page 89: Pasolink Plus

INTERFACE TERMINALS AND JACKS ROI-S04052

2-8

LAN CH3(Modular Connector)

LAN (CH3) signal input/output of 10BASE-T (cross/straight can be set by S9 on the Front Board (see chapter 4))STRAIGHT CROSS

Pin C1 LAN3 TX+ LAN3 RX+

Pin C2 LAN3 TX− LAN3 RX−

Pin C3 LAN3 RX+ LAN3 TX+

Pin C6 LAN3 RX− LAN3 TX−

LAN CH4(Modular Connector)

LAN (CH4) signal input/output of 10BASE-T (cross/straight can be set by S10 on the Front Board (see chapter 4))STRAIGHT CROSS

Pin D1 LAN4 TX+ LAN4 RX+

Pin D2 LAN4 TX− LAN4 RX−

Pin D3 LAN4 RX+ LAN4 TX+

Pin D6 LAN4 RX− LAN4 TX−

LAN DSC/WS(Modular Connector)

LAN DSC or WS signal input/output of 10BASE-T (cross/straight can be set by S6 on the Front Board (see chapter 4))STRAIGHT CROSS

Pin 1 L TX+ L RX+

Pin 2 L TX− L RX−

Pin 3 L RX+ L TX+

Pin 6 L RX− L TX−

SC IN/OUT(D-sub Connector, 37 Pins)

Service channel data input/output

Pins 1 (+) and 20 (–) V11 clock (CLK) 2 output

Pins 2 (+) and 21 (–) V11 frame plus (FP) 2 output

Pins 3 (+) and 22 (–) V11 output 2

Pins 4 (+) and 23 (–) V11 input 2

Pins 5 (+) and 24 (–) V11 FP 2 input

Pins 6 (+) and 25 (–) V11 CLK 2 input

Pins 11 (+) and 30 (–) V11 CLK 1 output

Table 2-1 Interface Terminals and Jacks for IDU (Cont’d)

Terminal/Jack Description

Page 90: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04052 INTERFACE TERMINALS AND JACKS

2-9

Pins 12 (+) and 31 (–) V11 FP 1 output

Pins 13 (+) and 32 (–) V11 output 1

Pins 14 (+) and 33 (–) V11 input 1

Pins 15 (+) and 34 (–) V11 FP 1 input

Pins 16 (+) and 35 (–) V11 CLK 1 input

Pins 17 (+) and 36 (–) Voice frequency (VF) output

Pins 18 (+) and 37 (–) VF input

Pins 7 (COM) and 26 (NO)

Cluster (CLSTR) alarm 2 outputNormal state : OpenAlarm/Event state : Closed

Pins 9 (COM) and 28 (NO)

CLSTR alarm 1 outputNormal state : OpenAlarm/Event state : Closed

Pins 8 (+) and 27 (–) CLSTR alarm 2 inputNormal state : OpenAlarm/Event state : Closed

Pins 10 (+) and 29 (–) CLSTR alarm 1 inputNormal state : OpenAlarm/Event state : Closed

Pin 19 Ground

ALM(D-sub Connector, 25 Pins)

Alarm signal output

Pins 25 (COM), 12 (NC) and 13 (NO) RL1

Maintenance alarm outputBetween Between

Pins 25 and 12 Pins 25 and 13Normal state : Closed OpenAlarm state : Open Closed

Pins 11 (COM), 23 (NC) and 24 (NO) RL2

Power alarm outputBetween Between

Pins 11 and 23 Pins 11 and 24Normal state : Closed OpenAlarm state : Open Closed

Table 2-1 Interface Terminals and Jacks for IDU (Cont’d)

Terminal/Jack Description

Page 91: Pasolink Plus

INTERFACE TERMINALS AND JACKS ROI-S04052

2-10

Pins 9 (COM), 21 (NC) and 22 (NO) RL3

CPU alarm outputBetween Between

Pins 9 and 21 Pins 9 and 22Normal state : Closed OpenAlarm state : Open Closed

Pins 20 (COM), 7 (NC) and 8 (NO) RL4

ODU alarm output *1Between Between

Pins 20 and 7 Pins 20 and 8Normal state : Closed OpenAlarm/Event state : Open Closed

Pins 18 (COM), 5 (NC) and 6 (NO) RL5

IDU alarm output *1Between Between

Pins 18 and 5 Pins 18 and 6Normal state : Closed OpenAlarm/Event state : Open Closed

Pins 4 (COM), 16 (NC) and 17 (NO) RL6

BER alarm output *1Between Between

Pins 4 and 16 Pins 4 and 17Normal state : Closed OpenAlarm/Event state : Open Closed

Pins 15 (COM), 2 (NC) and 3 (NO) RL7

Main interface (INTFC) 2M loss signal/CLK loss alarm output *1

Between BetweenPins 15 and 2 Pins 15 and 3

Normal state : Closed OpenAlarm/Event state : Open Closed

Pins 1,10,14 and 19) Ground

ALM/AUX(D-sub Connector, 25 Pins)

Alarm and transmission network surveillance auxiliary input/output

Pins 1 (+) and 14 (−) House Keeping (HK)1 alarm input *2Normal state : OpenAlarm/Event state : Closed

Pins 2 (+) and 15 (−) HK2 alarm input *2 Normal state : Open

Alarm/Event state : Closed

Pins 3 (+) and 16 (−) HK3 alarm input *2 Normal state : Open

Alarm/Event state : Closed

Table 2-1 Interface Terminals and Jacks for IDU (Cont’d)

Terminal/Jack Description

Page 92: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04052 INTERFACE TERMINALS AND JACKS

2-11

Pins 4 (+) and 17 (−) HK4 alarm input *2 Normal state : Open

Alarm/Event state : Closed

Pins 5 (+) and 18 (−) HK5 alarm input *2 Normal state : Open

Alarm/Event state : Closed

Pins 6 (+) and 19 (−) HK6 alarm input *2 Normal state : Open

Alarm/Event state : Closed

Pins 7 (COM), 20 (NC) and 21 (NO) RL11*3

House keeping (HK)1 control output*1 or equipment alarm output*4

Between BetweenPins 7 and 20 Pins 7 and 21

Normal state : Closed OpenAlarm/Event state : Open Closed

Pins 22 (COM), 8 (NC) and 9 (NO) RL10 *3

HK2 control output *1 or equipment alarm output*4Between Between

Pins 22 and 8 Pins 22 and 9Normal state : Closed OpenAlarm/Event state : Open Closed

Pins 10 (COM), 23 (NC) and 24 (NO) RL9 *3

HK3 control output *1 or equipment alarm output*4Between Between

Pins 10 and 23 Pins 10 and 24Normal state : Closed OpenAlarm/Event state : Open Closed

Pins 25 (COM), 11 (NC) and 12 (NO) RL8 *3

HK4 control output *1 or equipment alarm output*4Between Between

Pins 25 and 11 Pins 25 and 12Normal state : Closed OpenAlarm/Event state : Open Closed

Pin 13 Ground

FG Frame ground

G Wrist band ground

SEL V(Molex M5557-4R Connector, 4 Pins)

–36 to –60 VDC (or +36 to +60 VDC)/ –20 to –60 VDC (or +20 to +60 VDC)*5 power input

Pins 1 and 3 0 V (or +48 V)/0 V (or +24 V)*5

Table 2-1 Interface Terminals and Jacks for IDU (Cont’d)

Terminal/Jack Description

Page 93: Pasolink Plus

INTERFACE TERMINALS AND JACKS ROI-S04052

2-12

Notes:1. *1 This is a factory setting (default setting).2. *2 Resistance of opened relay terminal is more than 200

kohms. One of closed relay terminal is less than 50 ohms.3. *3 The relay is rated at 0.2A.4. *4 These alarm items can be set by the LCT as shown in Table

2-2. Alarms may be assigned to RL4 to RL11.5. *5 Optional.

Pins 2 and 4 –48 V (or 0 V)/–24 V (or 0 V)*5

Table 2-1 Interface Terminals and Jacks for IDU (Cont’d)

Terminal/Jack Description

Table 2-2 Summarized External Alarms (Form-C)

ALARM ITEM

INTERFACE TERMINAL

ALM ALM/AUX

RL4 RL5 RL6 RL7 RL8 RL9 RL10 RL11

ODU ALM 1/2

TX PWR ALM 1/2

TX INPUT ALM 1/2

RX LEV ALM 1/2

APC ALM 1/2

CABLE ALM 1/2

IDU ALM 1/2

MOD ALM 1/2

DEM ALM 1/2

LOF 1/2

BER ALM1/2

HIGH BER 1/2

INTFC TX/RX ALM

MAIN INTFC 2M LOS

MAIN INTFC

SUB INTFC 2M LOS

SUB INTFC

HK1 OUT

HK2 OUT

Page 94: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04052 INTERFACE TERMINALS AND JACKS

2-13

Notes:1. marks are set at factory. (default setting)2. marks can be set by LCT. The relay can be set-up so that

they will be triggered two or more alarm items.3. Alarms can be assigned to RL8 to RL11 if the relays have not

been designated for HK control.4. The number after an alarm item shows a channel number.5. While the CPU is initialized by depressing the RESET switch,

alarm(s) is in normal condition. After initialization, the alarminformation is properly provided through relay contacts.

HK3 OUT

HK4 OUT

Table 2-2 Summarized External Alarms (Form-C) (Cont’d)

ALARM ITEM

INTERFACE TERMINAL

ALM ALM/AUX

RL4 RL5 RL6 RL7 RL8 RL9 RL10 RL11

Table 2-3 Interface Terminals and Jacks for ODU

Terminal/Jack Description

IF IN/OUT(N-J Connector)

TX IF signal input and RX IF signal output

Warning: Do not disconnect the coaxial cable while theIDU is powered on.

FG Frame ground

RF IN/OUT(6/7/8 GHz : SMA)(11 GHz : PBR-100)(13/15 GHz : PBR-140)(18/23 GHz : PBR-220)(26 GHz : PBR-260)(38 GHz : PBR-320)

RF signal input/output from/to antenna

Page 95: Pasolink Plus

INTERFACE TERMINALS AND JACKS ROI-S04052

2-1414 pages

(This page is intentionally left blank.)

Page 96: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04052 CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND TEST JACKS

3-1

3. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND TEST JACKS

The controls, indicators and test jacks of the IDU and ODU are describedin this chapter.

3.1 IDU

The controls, indicators and jacks of the IDU are shown in Fig. 3-1. Theirfunctions are described as follows:

Fig. 3-1 IDU Controls, Indicators and Test Jacks

No.1 PWR indicator:Lights when the PWR switch of No.1 channel is turned on.

No.2 PWR indicator:Lights when the PWR switch of No.2 channel is turned on.

No.1 PWR switch:Turns on or off the input DC power for No.1 channel.

RESET

CALLNo.2 PWR

R SW

MAINTEOW

No.1 TX STATUS

SEL VFUSE (7.5A)

PWR

PWR +−

G8538 MD UNIT

No.1 RX STATUS

No.1 ODU ALM

No.1 IDU ALM

No.2 TX STATUS

No.2 RX STATUS

No.2 ODU ALM

No.2 IDU ALM

No.1 PWR

No.2PWR switch

No.1PWR switch

ALM/AUX CALLRESET

IDU

STATUS

+

R SWEOW

PASOLINK

LAN CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

ALM

TX

MAINT

ODURX

G8540 SW UNIT

1

2CH1-CH8 IN/OUT

SC IN/OUT

CH9-CH16 WS IN/OUT

ALM

LAN DSC/WS

SEL VFUSE (7.5A)

PWR

PWR +−

G8538 MDUNIT

LAN DSC/WS CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4LAN

ERR

LINK

ERR

LINK

Page 97: Pasolink Plus

CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND TEST JACKS ROI-S04052

3-2

No.2 PWR switch:Turns on or off the input DC power for No.2 channel.

No.1 IDU ALM indicator:Lights when:• Interface (INTFC) clock of TX side is lost CTRL• INTFC signal/clock of RX side is lost CTRL• Input data of main channel (CH1-16) is lost CTRL• Main INTFC module failure CTRL• MOD IF output level down or TX DPU failure No.1

MODEM• Input IF signal is lost No.1 MODEM• Frame synchronization is lost No.1 MODEM

• BER is worse than preset value (10-3 to 10-6, seletable) No.1MODEM

• DC-DC CONV unit failure No.1 DC-DC CONV• Input data of wayside is lost LAN DSC/WS• SUB INTFC module failure LAN DSC/WS

No.2 IDU ALM indicator:Lights when:• Interface (INTFC) clock of TX side is lost CTRL• INTFC signal/clock of RX side is lost CTRL• Input data of main channel (CH1-16) is lost CTRL• Main INTFC module failure CTRL• MOD IF output level down or TX DPU failure No.2

MODEM• Input IF signal is lost No.2 MODEM• Frame synchronization is lost No.2 MODEM

• BER is worse than preset value (10-3 to 10-6, seletable) No.2MODEM

• DC-DC CONV unit failure No.2 DC-DC CONV• Input data of wayside is lost LAN DSC/WS• SUB INTFC module failure LAN DSC/WS

Page 98: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04052 CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND TEST JACKS

3-3

No.1 ODU ALM indicatorLights when:• Transmit RF power of No.1 channel ODU increases/decreases

approx. 3 dB from normal• Receiver input level of the No.1 channel ODU decreases below

squelch level• APC loop of local oscillator in No.1 channel ODU is unlocked• IF signal from the IDU at No.1 channel ODU is lost• Communication between the No.1 channel ODU and No.1

channel IDU is lost

No.2 ODU ALM indicatorLights when:• Transmit RF power of No.2 channel ODU increases/decreases

approx. 3 dB from normal• Receiver input level of No.2 channel ODU decreases below

squelch level• APC loop of local oscillator in No.2 channel ODU is unlocked• IF signal from the IDU at No.2 channel ODU is lost• Communication between the No.2 channel ODU and No.2

channel IDU is lost

No.1 TX STATUS indicator :Lights when the modulator and transmitter of No.1 channel isselected.

No.2 TX STATUS indicator :Lights when the modulator and transmitter of No.2 channel isselected.

No.1 RX STATUS indicator :Lights when the receiver and demodulator of No.1 channel isselected.

No.2 RX STATUS indicator :Lights when the receiver and demodulator of No.2 channel isselected.

MAINT indicatorLights when the maintenance ON mode is selected by the LCT.

Page 99: Pasolink Plus

CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND TEST JACKS ROI-S04052

3-4

RESET switch:RESET switch initializes the CPU.Note: When the indication on the LCT is frozen or the CPU is

abnormal, press the RESET switch.

CALL switch:Transmits the calling signal, and rings the buzzer in the oppositestation.

EOW jack:Accesses EOW signal when headset is connected.

R SW switch:Used to go back to the previous program version after the IDUprogram is updated. Slide the switch from the current position tothe other position. Then press the RESET switch.

Caution: Contact NEC before R SW operation. Equipment may notfunction correctly with improper operation.

LINK indicator: LAN CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4 (10BASE-T, Optional)• Blinks when a setup is made into LAN mode, but the LAN

(IDU) and associated equipment is not linked.• Lights when a setup is made into LAN mode, and the LAN

(IDU) and associated equipment is linked.Note: When a setup is made into E1 (2.048 Mbps bipolar)

mode, the LINK indicator is unlighted.

ERR indicator:Lights when the memory of LAN overflows or collision occurs.

LINK indicator: LAN DSC/WS (SUB INTERFACE 10BASE-TOptional)

• Blinks when a setup is made into sub interface 10BASE-Tmode, but the LAN (10BASE-T IDU) and associated equipmentis not linked.

• Lights when a setup is made into sub interface 10BASE-Tmode, and the LAN (IDU) and associated equipment is linked.Note: When a setup is made into WS E1 (2.048 Mbps pipolar)

mode, the LINK indicator is unlighted.

ERR indicator:Lights when the memory of LAN overflows or collision occurs.

Page 100: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04052 CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND TEST JACKS

3-5

3.2 ODU

The controls, indicators and test jacks of the ODU are shown in Fig. 3-2.

Fig. 3-2 ODU Controls, Indicators and Test Jacks

Their functions are described as follows:

RX LEV MON:

• Gives access to the receiving level monitoring voltage.• Provided for transmission of OW signal between IDUs and ODUs

when the OW/RX LEV Monitor and headset is connected.

The X0818A OW/RX LEV Monitor (optional) is used for operation andmaintenance and is shown in Fig. 3-3. The operation range of the OW/RXLEV Monitor is 0 °C to +45 °C. The function of the controls/interfaces ofthe OW/RX LEV Monitor are described as follows:

METER:Indicates receiving RF level monitoring voltage.

Note: When the RF level is monitored, set to “Antenna AlignmentMode” of Control in Maintenance by LCT.

OW indicator:Lights when OW communication is performed (The OW ON-OFFswitch is set to ON). When the OW indicator is not lit even thoughthe OW switch is set to ON, replace the battery (6F22(UB)/9V) sincethe battery had become weak.

IFL FG RX LEVMON

RX LEV MON

6/7/8 GHz BAND ODU 11-38 GHz BAND ODU

RX LEV MON

Page 101: Pasolink Plus

CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND TEST JACKS ROI-S04052

3-66 pages

OW ON-OFF switch:Enables transmission of OW signal between IDU and ODU.

VOL control:Adjusts receive OW voice level.

RX LEV/OW IN:Input connector for the RX LEV monitoring voltage and OW signal.

HEADSET jack:Permits communication between IDU and ODU when orderwireheadset is connected.

Fig. 3-3 Controls, Indicators and Test Jacks of OW/RX LEV Monitor

VOL

ON O

W OFF

12 3

450

V

PASOLINKANTENNA POINTING MONITOR

OW

RX LEV/OW IN

HEADSET

METER

OW INDICATOROW SWITCH

VOL CONTROL

RX LEV/OW IN HEADSET JACK

BATTERY(6F22(UB)/9V)

Page 102: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04052 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT IMPEDANCE AND LAN CABLE SELECTION

4-1

4. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT IMPEDANCE AND LAN CABLE SELECTION

Input/output terminal impedance (120 ohms or 75 ohms) can be selectedby switch. Also, the cable type (straight/cross) for LAN CH1 – CH4 andLAN DSC/WS connectors can be selected by switch. These switches canbe access by removing the top cover (see Fig. 4-2).

Chart 4-1 Data Input/Output Impedance and LAN Cable Selection

Step Procedure

Note: These switches are set by factory setting according tocustomer requirement.

1 Loosen two screws on the MD UNIT of No.1 channel (see Fig.4-1),

2 To remove the MD UNIT, hold the MD UNIT then pull itforward (see Fig. 4-1),

3 Referring to Fig. 4-2, set switches to desired position,

4 After setting, place the MD UNIT at the location for mounting,then push along the guide rail until the multi-pin connectorexactly fits,

5 Tighten two screws on the MD UNIT.

Fig. 4-1 Screw Location

SCREW

ALM/AUX CALLRESET

IDU

STATUS

+

R SWEOW

PASOLINK

LAN CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

NE1 NE2 V11PNMS

LAN

ALM

TX

MAINT

SEL VFUSE (7.5A)

PWRIF IN/OUT

PWR +−

WARNING-43V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWERBEFORE DISCONNECTING

I/F CABLE

!

SEL VFUSE (7.5A)

PWRIF IN/OUT

PWR +−WARNING-43V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWERBEFORE DISCONNECTING

I/F CABLE

!

ODURX

G8538 MD UNIT

G8540 SW UNIT

G8538 MD UNIT

1

2

PNMT LCT EOW1 EOW2

CH1-CH8 IN/OUT

SC IN/OUT

CH9-CH16 WS IN/OUT

ALM

LAN DSC/WS

MD UNIT

Page 103: Pasolink Plus

DATA INPUT/OUTPUT IMPEDANCE AND LAN CABLE SELECTION ROI-S04052

4-2

Fig. 4-2 Switching Option (1/2)

The S1 to S10 are set by screwdriver etc.

TOP VIEW

S6 S7 S8 S10S9 S1 S2 S3 S5S4STRSTRSTRSTRSTR

75 75757575

120 120120120120

CROSS×

CROSS×

CROSS×

CROSS×

CROSS×

FRONT BOARD

S11 CH1 IN2 CH1 OUT3 CH2 IN4 CH2 OUT5 CH3 IN6 CH3 OUT7 CH4 IN8 CH4 OUT

LAN DSC/SW

LAN CH1

LAN CH2

LAN CH3

LAN CH4

CH1-4CH5-8

CH9-12CH13-16

WS

(1) (8) (1) (8) (1) (8) (1) (8) (1) (2)

S21 CH5 IN2 CH5 OUT3 CH6 IN4 CH6 OUT5 CH7 IN6 CH7 OUT7 CH8 IN8 CH8 OUT

S31 CH9 IN2 CH9 OUT3 CH10 IN4 CH10 OUT5 CH11 IN6 CH11 OUT7 CH12 IN8 CH12 OUT

S41 CH13 IN2 CH13 OUT3 CH14 IN4 CH14 OUT5 CH15 IN6 CH15 OUT7 CH16 IN8 CH16 OUT

S51 WSIN2 WSOUT

S6 S7 S8 S10S9 S1 S2 S3 S5S4STRSTRSTRSTRSTR

75 75757575

120 120120120120

CROSS×

CROSS×

CROSS×

CROSS×

CROSS×

Page 104: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04052 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT IMPEDANCE AND LAN CABLE SELECTION

4-3

Fig. 4-2 Switching Option (2/2)

S6USING CROSS CABLE USING STRIGHT CALBE

Pin 1 LAN DSC/WS LTX+ LAN DSC/WS LRX+Pin 2 LAN DSC/WS LTX− LAN DSC/WS LRX−Pin 3 LAN DSC/WS LRX+ LAN DSC/WS LTX+Pin 6 LAN DSC/WS LRX− LAN DSC/WS LTX−

S7 to S10USING CROSS CABLE USING STRIGHT CALBE

Pin 1 CH( ) LTX+ CH( ) LRX+Pin 2 CH( ) LTX− CH( ) LRX−Pin 3 CH( ) LRX+ CH( ) LTX+Pin 6 CH( ) LRX− CH( ) LTX−

Switching Function Set Position Remarks

Selection for 120 ohms-75 ohms impedance of input/output data signal (S1 to S4).

When the 120 ohms impedance is required, all switches are set to “120” position.

2 MB × 8: Applies only to S1 to S2.

2 MB × 16: Applies to S1 to S4.

When the 75 ohms impedance is required, all switches are set to “75” position.

Selection for 120 ohms-75 ohms impedance of input/output WS signal (S5)

When the 120 ohms impedance is required, all switches are set to “120” position.

Applies to 2 MB × 16 system.

When the 75 ohms impedance is required, all switches are set to “75” position.

Selection for connection cable of LAN (S6)

When a straight cable is connected to LAN DSC/WS connector, switch is set to CROSS position.

When a cross cable is connected to LAN DSC/WS connector, switch is set to STR position.

Selection for connection cable of LAN (S7 to S10)

When a straight cable is connected to LAN CH( ) connector, switch is set to CROSS position.

Applies only to equipment e/w 10BASE-T

When a cross cable is connected to LAN CH( ) connector, switch is set to STR position.

Page 105: Pasolink Plus

DATA INPUT/OUTPUT IMPEDANCE AND LAN CABLE SELECTION ROI-S04052

4-44 pages

(This page is intentionally left blank.)

Page 106: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04052 EQUIPMENT START-UP AND SHUT-DOWN

5-1

5. EQUIPMENT START-UP AND SHUT-DOWN

Procedures for equipment start-up and shut-down are provided in Chart 5-1 and Chart 5-2.

Warning: After turning ON the equipment, wait at least 1 minutebefore turning it OFF again. Repeatedly turning the powerON and OFF within a short interval may cause the IDU tofail.

5.1 Start-up

The start-up procedure for the equipment is shown in Chart 5-1.

Chart 5-1 Start-up

This procedure describes how to turn the power on/off after the initiallineup is completed and the configuration of frequency and transmit outputlevel is also completed.

Caution: Do not apply to the equipment a voltage that varies sharply.The equipment may operate wrongly.

Apparatus:Suitable ScrewdriverDigital Multimeter

Step Procedure

Notes: 1. The ODU power is supplied by the IDU.2. Power turn on procedures for No.1 and No.2 are

identical.

1 Check that the IF cable between the IDU and the ODU isconnected,

2 Turn on the PWR switch on the IDU (see Fig. 5-1),

3 Confirm that the PWR indicator on the IDU is lighted and thatall alarm indicators are unlighted.

Page 107: Pasolink Plus

EQUIPMENT START-UP AND SHUT-DOWN ROI-S04052

5-22 pages

Fig. 5-1 Power Switch and Indicator Location

5.2 Shut-down

The shut-down procedure for the equipment is shown in Chart 5-2.

Chart 5-2 Shut-down

Step Procedure

1 Turn off the PWR switch on the front of the IDU (see Fig. 5-1).

No.1PWR SWITCH No.1 PWR

No.2PWR SWITCH

No.2 PWR

CALLRESET

IDU

STATUS

+

R SWEOW

PASOLINK

TX

MAINT

SEL VFUSE (7.5A)

PWR

PWR +−

SEL VFUSE (7.5A)

PWR

PWR +−

ODURX

G8538 MD UNIT

G8540 SW UNIT

G8538 MD UNIT

1

2

ALM

Page 108: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04052 SETTING AND MONITORING IN LCT

6-1

6. SETTING AND MONITORING IN LCT

This chapter outlines the system configuration setting/monitoringprovisioning setting, maintenance, alarm/status monitoring andperformance monitoring operation performed by local craft terminal(LCT).

6.1 General

The LCT can be used to perform the following items.

Login Level(login name)

Password

Admin

(12345678)

User

(None)

Menu ALARM /STATUS ALARM/STATUS

PERFORMANCEMONITOR• Display Metering/BER• Display Performance

Monitor• Display Threshold Data• Set Threshold Data

PERFORMANCEMONITOR• Display Metering/BER• Display Performance

Monitor

PROVISIONING DATA• Display Current Data• Set Provisioning Data

PROVISIONING DATA• Display Current Data

SYSTEMCONFIGURATION• Display Radio Equipment

Configuration• Display Network

Configuration• Setup Radio Equipment

Configuration

SYSTEMCONFIGURATION• Display Radio Equipment

Configuration• Display Network

Configuration

INVENTORY DATA• Display Inventory Data

INVENTORY DATA• Display Inventory Data

RELAY/HOUSE KEEPING• Display Current State• Relay Configuration• Output Control

RELAY/HOUSE KEEPING• Display Current State

Page 109: Pasolink Plus

SETTING AND MONITORING IN LCT ROI-S04052

6-2

The password can be changed when “Admin” level is logged in. Forprocedures to change the password, refer to the Appendix in Maintenancesection.

Note: Do not forget the changed password. If you forget a password,report to NEC.

Equipment setting in provisioning data can not be changed in “User” level.

Login Level(login name)

Admin User

MAINTENANCE• Maint Mode• Control• Reset CPU• Set Calendar• Password Setting• Program Download

(Logout)

Page 110: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04052 SETTING AND MONITORING IN LCT

6-3

General of menu flow for 1+1 system is shown below.

(Logout)

AA

Alarm/Status

Display Metering/BERPerformance Monitor

Set Threshold Data

BBE Occur

BBE Recover

Display Threshold Data

Display Performance Monitor

15 min Register/CH

15 min Register/TOTAL

1 day Register/CH

1 day Register/TOTAL

15 min Register/CH

ES Occur

ES Recover

SES Occur

SES Recover

UAS Occur

UAS Recover

A

BBE Occur

BBE Recover

15 min Register/TOTAL

ES Occur

ES Recover

SES Occur

SES Recover

UAS Occur

UAS Recover

OFS Occur

OFS Recover

Page 111: Pasolink Plus

SETTING AND MONITORING IN LCT ROI-S04052

6-4

BB

AAA

BBE Occur

BBE Recover

1 day Register/CH

ES Occur

ES Recover

SES Occur

SES Recover

UAS Occur

UAS Recover

BBE Occur

BBE Recover

ES Occur

ES Recover

SES Occur

SES Recover

UAS Occur

UAS Recover

1 day Register/TOTAL

OFS Occur

OFS Recover

Page 112: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04052 SETTING AND MONITORING IN LCT

6-5

BBProvisioning Data

Display Current DataSet Provisioning Data

Main Channel UsageBER ThresholdSub Interface

WS

CC

10 BASE-TSC Assignment

Easy

VF-1 Setting

DSC 9.6KB-2 SettingCLSTR ALM SettingDSC 64KB-1 SettingDSC 64KB-1 Direction Setting

10BASE-T DSC Setting

DSC 9.6KB-1 Setting

DSC 64KB-2 Setting

MTPC TX PWR

ATPC MAXIMUM PWR

ATPC Range

ATPC MINIMUM PWRRX ThresholdAdditional ATTODU ALM Mode

System ConfigurationDisplay Radio Equipment ConfigurationSetup Radio Equipment Configuration

Equipment Configuration

TX Power Control

RF Frequency

Frame ID

Main Interface

DSC 64KB-2 Direction Setting

Customize

RX SW PriorityTX SW Priority

BER AIS

Channel Usage Error

Page 113: Pasolink Plus

SETTING AND MONITORING IN LCT ROI-S04052

6-6

CC

Inventory Data

Display Inventory Data

DD

Relay Configuration

Display Current State

HK-OUT 1/2/3/4 Enable

Relay/House keeping

HK-OUT 1/2/3 Enable

HK-OUT 1/2 Enable

HK-OUT 1 Enable

HK-OUT Disable

ODU ALM1/2 RL04 to RL11

IDU ALM1/2 RL04 to RL11

TX PWR ALM1/2 RL04 to RL11

TX IN ALM1/2 RL04 to RL11

RX LEV ALM1/2 RL04 to RL11

APC ALM1/2 RL04 to RL11

CABLE ALM1/2 RL04 to RL11

BER ALM1/2 RL04 to RL11

MOD ALM1/2 RL04 to RL11

DEM ALM1/2 RL04 to RL11

MAIN INTFC RL04 to RL11

SUB INTFC RL04 to RL11

Output ControlHK-OUT1

HK-OUT2

HK-OUT3

HK-OUT4

LOF 1/2 RL04 to RL11

INTFC TX ALM RL04 to RL11

INTFC RX ALM RL04 to RL11

SUB INTFC 2M LOSS RL04 to RL11

MAIN INTFC 2M LOSS RL04 to RL11

HIGH BER1/2 RL04 to RL11

Page 114: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04052 SETTING AND MONITORING IN LCT

6-7

MIANTENANCE (Admin mode only)

MAINT Mode

Control

RF Frequency

ATPC Manual Control

TX MUTE

CW

IF Loopback

Main 2M Loopback (Near End)

Selected CH Loopback/All CH Loopback Off

Main 2M Loopback (Far End)

DD

TX SW Manual Control

RX SW Manual Control

Selected CH Loopback/All CH Loopback Off

Reset CPU

IDU/CTRL

IDU/MODEM

ODU

Set Calendar

Password Setting

Program Download

Antenna Alignment Mode

Page 115: Pasolink Plus

SETTING AND MONITORING IN LCT ROI-S04052

6-88 pages

(This page is intentionally left blank.)

Page 116: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053-052E CONTENTS020326

CL-1

6-38 GHz 17/34 MBPDH DIGITAL MICROWAVE RADIO SYSTEM

PASOLINK +

(PDH/1+1 SYSTEM)

INSTALLATION AND INITIAL LINE UP

CONTENTS

TITLE PAGE1. GENERAL ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1-1

2. INSTALLATION••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-12.1 Packing List ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-22.2 Unpacking of IDU and ODU••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-92.3 Data Input/Output Impedance and

LAN Cable Selection••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-152.4 IDU Mounting •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-182.5 ODU Mounting••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-202.5.1 Mounting•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-212.5.2 Demounting •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-442.6 Cable Termination•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-452.7 Cable and Terminal Connections •••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-612.8 Frame Grounding••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-752.9 Waterproof Protection••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-78

3. INITIAL LINE UP ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-13.1 Start-up••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-13.2 Shut-down ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-33.3 Initial Setting•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-33.4 Antenna Orientation ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-273.5 Lineup Test••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-33

Page 117: Pasolink Plus

CONTENTS ROI-S04053

CL-22 pages

(This page is intentionally left blank.)

Page 118: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 GENERAL

1-1

1. GENERAL

This section provides installation and initial line up information on the 6/7/8/11/13/15/18/23/26/38 GHz 17/34 MB microwave radio system.

The firmware version described in this manual is 1.0.**.

Page 119: Pasolink Plus

GENERAL ROI-S04053

1-22 pages

(This page is intentionally left blank.)

Page 120: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INSTALLATION

2-1

2. INSTALLATION

The standard installation is summarized in this section. Included hereinare information on typical installation work flow and guides for IDUinstallation, ODU installation, Antenna (ANT) installation, waveguideconnection and cable connections. The installation flow diagram is shownbelow.

Fig. 2-1 Typical Installation Flow Diagram

Unpacking of IDU(see para 2.2)

Unpacking of ODU(see para 2.2)

Frame Grounding(see para 2.8)

Cable Termination(see para 2.6)

ODU Mounting(see para 2.5)

IDU Mounting(see para 2.4)

Waterproof Protection

(see para 2.9)

Cable and Terminal Connections(see para 2.7)

Waveguide Connection

(see para 2.5.1)(If required)

Data Input/Output Impedance and LAN

Cable Selection(see para 2.3)

Page 121: Pasolink Plus

INSTALLATION ROI-S04053

2-2

2.1 Packing List

Each unpacked component of the [ ] GHz [ ] MB digital radio systemmust be checked as shown below.

Note: * These are standard packing boxes.

PACKING LIST DRAWING NO.

IDU and ODU Figs. 2-2 and 2-3

Mounting Bracket Fig. 2-4 *

Installation Kit Fig. 2-5 *

Page 122: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INSTALLATION

2-3/4

Fig. 2-2 Packing List for IDU and 6/7/8 GHz Band ODU

No. DESCRIPTION

1 TRP-( )G-1AA ODU (Coaxial type)

2 MDP-17MB4T-2/MDP-34MB4T-2 IDU

3 Power Connector (Molex Housing M5557-4R (× 2ea))

NAME PLATE

(LEFT SIDE VIEW)

! WARNING-43V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWERBEFORE DISCONNECTING

I/F CABLE

(BOTTOM VIEW)

NAME PLATE

Note: Other cables and connectors except those describedin this figure must be provided by the customer.

MDP-17MB4T-2

WEIGHT: 13 kg (WITH OPTION)

NEC Corporation TOKYO JAPAN MADE IN JAPAN

SERIAL No. DATE . INDOOR UNIT

20-60 V - A(WITH ODU & OPTION)

0678(G8536)

!

PASOLINK

SUB Band

SERIAL No. DATEWEIGHT 10kg/–43V 0.9A

( )

NEC Corporation TOKYO JAPAN MADE IN JAPAN

TXhigh/low

TRP-( )G-1AAOUTDOOR UNIT (HG)

+

TX frequency

! WARNINGTurn off power of IDU before disconnecting cable.

! CAUTION

HOT SURFACEAvoid contact

0678 !

1

2

3

Page 123: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INSTALLATION

2-5/6

Fig. 2-3 Packing List for IDU and 11-38 GHz Band ODU

No. DESCRIPTION

1 TRP-( )G-1AA (ODU) (Antenna direct mounting type)

2 TRP-( )G-1AA (ODU) (Waveguide type)

3 O-Ring (Attached to the antenna direct mounting type ODU)

4 O-Ring (Attached to the waveguide type ODU)

5 MDP-17MB4T-2/MDP-34MB4T-2 IDU

6 Power Connector (Molex Housing M5557-4R (×2ea)

NAME PLATE

ANTENNA DIRECT MOUNTING TYPE

WARNING-43V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWERBEFORE DISCONNECTING

I/F CABLE

WAVEGUIDE TYPE

WARNING!

Turn off power at IDUbefore disconnecting cable.

MDP-17MB4T-2

WEIGHT: 13 kg (WITH OPTION)

NEC Corporation TOKYO JAPAN MADE IN JAPAN

SERIAL No. DATE . INDOOR UNIT

20-60 V - A(WITH ODU & OPTION)

0678(G8536)

!

! CAUTION

HOT SURFACEAvoid contact

PASOLINK

shift frequencySERIAL No. DATE ,

WEIGHT 4.5kg/–43V 0.5A

( )

NEC Corporation TOKYO JAPAN MADE IN JAPAN

TXhigh/low

TRP-( )G-1AAOUTDOOR UNIT (HG)

+

MHz SUB band

Note: Other cables and connectors except those described in this figuremust be provided by the customer.

0678 !

1

2

3

4

5

6

Page 124: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INSTALLATION

2-7

Fig. 2-4 Packing List of Mounting Bracket

1 2

3

No. DESCRIPTION

1 Pole Mounting Bracket for 6/7/8 GHz Band ODU

2 Pole Mounting Bracket (New Type) for 11-38 GHz Band ODU

3 Pole Mounting Bracket (Old Type) for 11-38 GHz Band ODU

Page 125: Pasolink Plus

INSTA

LLATIO

NR

OI-S04053

2-8

ALM/AUX CALLRESET

IDU

STATUS

+

R SWEOW

PASOLINK

LAN CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

NE1 NE2 V11PNMS

LAN

ALM

TX

MAINT

SEL VFUSE (7.5A)

PWRIF IN/OUT

PWR +−

WARNING-43V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWERBEFORE DISCONNECTING

I/F CABLE

!

SEL VFUSE (7.5A)

PWRIF IN/OUT

PWR +−WARNING-43V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWERBEFORE DISCONNECTING

I/F CABLE

!

ODURX

G8538 MD UNIT

G8540 SW UNIT

G8538 MD UNIT

1

2

PNMT LCT EOW1 EOW2

CH1-CH8 IN/OUT

SC IN/OUT

CH9-CH16 WS IN/OUT

ALM

LAN DSC/WS

Fig. 2-5 Installation Kit Packing List of IDU and ODU

N-P CONNECTOR

MOLEX CONNECTOR(FEMALE)

D-SUB CONNECTOR (MALE)

D-SUB CONNECTOR (MALE)

MODULAR CONNECTOR (MALE)

MODULAR CONNECTOR (MALE)

MODULAR CONNECTOR (MALE)

MODULAR CONNECTOR (MALE)

MODULAR CONNECTOR (MALE)

D-SUB CONNECTOR (MALE)

MOLEX CONNECTOR(FEMALE)

N-P CONNECTOR

No.2ODU

No.1ODU

MODULAR CONNECTOR (MALE)

MODULAR CONNECTOR (MALE)

MODULAR CONNECTOR (MALE)

D-SUB CONNECTOR (MALE)

D-SUB CONNECTOR (MALE)

MODULAR CONNECTOR (MALE)

MODULAR CONNECTOR (MALE)

MODULAR CONNECTOR (MALE)

MODULAR CONNECTOR (MALE)

MODULAR CONNECTOR (MALE)

Page 126: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INSTALLATION

2-9

2.2 Unpacking of IDU and ODU

The procedures to unpack the IDU and ODU are shown in following chart.

• IDU : Chart 2-1• 6/7/8 GHz Band ODU : Chart 2-2• 11-38 GHz Band ODU : Chart 2-3

Note: When conveying the IDU or ODU to another place, the originalpacking should be made to avoid damage.

Chart 2-1 Unpacking Methods of IDU

Step Procedure

1 Cut p.p. tape at top of the carton (1 to 3). Then open thecarton.

21

3

Page 127: Pasolink Plus

INSTALLATION ROI-S04053

2-10

Chart 2-1 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

2 Take out the accessories, carton and cushioning materials.

CUSHIONINGMATERIAL

CARTON(ACCESSORIES)

CARTON(IDU)

CUSHIONINGMATERIAL(IDU)

Page 128: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INSTALLATION

2-11

Chart 2-1 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

3 Remove the cushioning materials from the carton (IDU).

4 Take out the IDU wrapped with antistatic bag from thecarton.

5 Take out the IDU from the antistatic bag.

6 Inspect the IDU.

ANTISTATIC IDU

CARTON (IDU)

Page 129: Pasolink Plus

INSTALLATION ROI-S04053

2-12

Chart 2-2 Unpacking Methods for 6/7/8 GHz Band ODU

Step Procedure

1 Cut the p.p. tape at top of the carton (1 to 3). Then open thecarton.

2 Take out the ODU with cushioning materials from thecarton.

21

3

CUSHIONINGMATERIALS

ODU

Page 130: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INSTALLATION

2-13

Chart 2-2 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

3 Remove the cushioning materials from the ODU.

4 Take out the ODU from the antistatic bag.

5 Inspect the ODU.

CUSHIONINGMATERIALS

ANTISTATIC BAG

ODU

Page 131: Pasolink Plus

INSTALLATION ROI-S04053

2-14

Chart 2-3 Unpacking Methods for 11-38 GHz Band ODU

Step Procedure

1 Cut the p.p. tape at top of the carton (1 to 3). Then open thecarton.

2 Take out the ODU with cushioning materials from thecarton.

3 Remove the cushioning materials from the ODU.

4 Take out the ODU from the antistatic bag.

5 Inspect the ODU.

21

3

CUSHIONING MATERIAL

CUSHIONING MATERIAL

ODU

CARTON

Page 132: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INSTALLATION

2-15

2.3 Data Input/Output Impedance and LAN Cable Selection

Input/output terminal impedance (120 ohms or 75 ohms) can be selectedby switch. Also, the cable type (straight/cross) for LAN CH1 – CH4 andLAN DSC/WS connectors can be selected by switch. These switches canbe access by removing the top cover (see Fig. 2-7).

Chart 2-4 Data Input/Output Impedance and LAN Cable Selection

Step Procedure

Note: These switches are set by factory setting according tocustomer requirement.

1 Loosen two screws on the MD UNIT of No.1 channel (seeFig. 2-6),

2 Hold the MD UNIT then pull it forward (see Fig. 2-6),

3 Referring to Fig. 2-7, set switches to desired position,

4 After setting, place the MD UNIT at the location formounting, then push along the guide rail until the multi-pinconnector exactly fits,

5 Tighten two screws on the MD UNIT.

Fig. 2-6 Screw Location

SCREW

ALM/AUX CALLRESET

IDU

STATUS

+

R SWEOW

PASOLINK

LAN CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

NE1 NE2 V11PNMS

LAN

ALM

TX

MAINT

SEL VFUSE (7.5A)

PWRIF IN/OUT

PWR +−

WARNING-43V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWERBEFORE DISCONNECTING

I/F CABLE

!

SEL VFUSE (7.5A)

PWRIF IN/OUT

PWR +−WARNING-43V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWERBEFORE DISCONNECTING

I/F CABLE

!

ODURX

G8538 MD UNIT

G8540 SW UNIT

G8538 MD UNIT

1

2

PNMT LCT EOW1 EOW2

CH1-CH8 IN/OUT

SC IN/OUT

CH9-CH16 WS IN/OUT

ALM

LAN DSC/WS

MD UNIT

Page 133: Pasolink Plus

INSTALLATION ROI-S04053

2-16

Fig. 2-7 Switching Option (1/2)

The S1 to S10 are set by screwdriver etc.

TOP VIEW

S6 S7 S8 S10S9 S1 S2 S3 S5S4STRSTRSTRSTRSTR

75 75757575

120 120120120120

CROSS×

CROSS×

CROSS×

CROSS×

CROSS×

FRONT BOARD

S11 CH1 IN2 CH1 OUT3 CH2 IN4 CH2 OUT5 CH3 IN6 CH3 OUT7 CH4 IN8 CH4 OUT

LAN DSC/SW

LAN CH1

LAN CH2

LAN CH3

LAN CH4

CH1-4CH5-8

CH9-12CH13-16

WS

(1) (8) (1) (8) (1) (8) (1) (8) (1) (2)

S21 CH5 IN2 CH5 OUT3 CH6 IN4 CH6 OUT5 CH7 IN6 CH7 OUT7 CH8 IN8 CH8 OUT

S31 CH9 IN2 CH9 OUT3 CH10 IN4 CH10 OUT5 CH11 IN6 CH11 OUT7 CH12 IN8 CH12 OUT

S41 CH13 IN2 CH13 OUT3 CH14 IN4 CH14 OUT5 CH15 IN6 CH15 OUT7 CH16 IN8 CH16 OUT

S51 WS IN2 WS OUT

S6 S7 S8 S10S9 S1 S2 S3 S5S4STRSTRSTRSTRSTR

75 75757575

120 120120120120

CROSS×

CROSS×

CROSS×

CROSS×

CROSS×

Page 134: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INSTALLATION

2-17

Fig. 2-7 Switching Option (2/2)

S6USING CROSS CABLE USING STRIGHT CALBE

Pin 1 LAN DSC/WS LTX+ LAN DSC/WS LRX+Pin 2 LAN DSC/WS LTX− LAN DSC/WS LRX−Pin 3 LAN DSC/WS LRX+ LAN DSC/WS LTX+Pin 6 LAN DSC/WS LRX− LAN DSC/WS LTX−

S7 to S10USING CROSS CABLE USING STRIGHT CALBE

Pin 1 CH( ) LTX+ CH( ) LRX+Pin 2 CH( ) LTX− CH( ) LRX−Pin 3 CH( ) LRX+ CH( ) LTX+Pin 6 CH( ) LRX− CH( ) LTX−

Switching Function Set Position Remarks

Selection for 120 ohms-75 ohms impedance of input/output data signal (S1 to S4).

When the 120 ohms impedance is required, all switches are set to “120” position.

2 MB × 8: Applies only to S1 to S2.

2 MB × 16: Applies to S1 to S4.

When the 75 ohms impedance is required, all switches are set to “75” position.

Selection for 120 ohms-75 ohms impedance of input/output WS signal (S5)

When the 120 ohms impedance is required, all switches are set to “120” position.

Applies to 2 MB × 16 system.

When the 75 ohms impedance is required, all switches are set to “75” position.

Selection for connection cable of LAN (S6)

When a straight cable is connected to LAN DSC/WS connector, switch is set to CROSS position.

When a cross cable is connected to LAN DSC/WS connector, switch is set to STR position.

Selection for connection cable of LAN (S7 to S10)

When a straight cable is connected to LAN CH( ) connector, switch is set to CROSS position.

Applies only to equipment e/w 10BASE-T

When a cross cable is connected to LAN CH( ) connector, switch is set to STR position.

Page 135: Pasolink Plus

INSTALLATION ROI-S04053

2-18

2.4 IDU Mounting

The installation procedure for IDU is shown in Chart 2-5. The IDU shouldbe installed in the radio station.

Chart 2-5 Mounting Methods of IDU

Step Procedure

1 Change the two brackets to desired position on the IDU, ifnecessary.

2 Align the IDU to the mounting position on the 19-inch rack.

FRONT POSITION

CENTER POSITION

SIDE VIEW

FRONT

SCREWFLAT WASHER

SCREW FLAT WASHER

SPRING WASHER

SPRING WASHER

Page 136: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INSTALLATION

2-19

Chart 2-5 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

3 Fix each side of the IDU to the 19-inch rack with the twoscrews.

4 To mount the IDU in a 19-inch rack, leave space for one unitat the top and bottom to allow heat from the IDU to radiate.

IDU

At least one rack unit

At least one rack unit

Page 137: Pasolink Plus

INSTALLATION ROI-S04053

2-20

2.5 ODU Mounting

The procedures for mounting and demounting the ODU are describedhere. There are two types of mounting for the ODU; using the NEC hybrid(HYB) and using the Quaser HYB. The ODU should be installed in theradio station. The tools for installation are listed in Table 2-1.

Caution: How to use small and large O-rings are shown in followingtable. Two (small and large) O-rings are attached in 18-38GHz band Andrew direct mount antenna. 11/13/15 GHzband antenna does not have small O-ring (Small O-ring isnot used for Andrew direct mount antenna). If the small O-ring is used for ODU direct mount installation, a gap mayoccur between ODU and antenna for RF interface.Therefore it may happen transmit or receive level down.

Note: 11/13/15 GHz antenna for direst mount is not possible to connectthe ordinary waveguide flanges.

Notes: 1. Do not use both small O-ring and large O-ringsimultaneously.

2. Large O-ring size is different with frequency band as follows:

Table 2-1 Tools

TOOLS

Wrench or Monkey wrench

Screwdriver

Torque Wrench

ATTACHENENT POSITION OF

O-RING (BETWEEN:)

O-RINGREMARKS

SMALL SIZE LARGE SIZE

ANT HYB Not used Used Antenna direct mounting

ANT WG/HYB(18-38 GHz BAND)

Used Not used Waveguide connection

POSITION OF LARGE O-RING

POSITION OF SMALL O-RING

Page 138: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INSTALLATION

2-21

2.5.1 Mounting

The method of mounting is listed in Table 2-2.

Note: When the ODU is mounted on the opposite side of thepole, reassemble the ODU to the right position by theprocedure described in Chart 2-7.

Chart 2-6 6/7/8 GHz Band ODU Mounting Using Quasar Hybrid

Step Procedure

1 Mount the bracket to the pole with U-bolts as shown below.Note: The diameter of the pole is from 48.5 to 114.5 millimeters.

32mm

35mm

13-23 GHz BAND 26-38 GHz BAND

40mm

11 GHz BAND

Table 2-2 Pole Mounting

Antenna Direct Mounting Type ODU

Antenna Direct Mounting ConnectionWaveguide ConnectionUsing NEC/

Quasar HYB Using NEC HYB Using Quasar HYB

6/7/8 GHz Band 11-38 GHz Band 11-38 GHz Band 11-38 GHz Band

Chart 2-6* Chart 2-8 Chart 2-9 Chart 2-10

THICK NUT (M10)THIN NUT (M10)

SPRING WASHERFLAT WASHER

U-BOLT

Page 139: Pasolink Plus

INSTALLATION ROI-S04053

2-22

Chart 2-6 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

2 Mount the bracket for fixing No.1 ODU on the brackets withthe four bolts (M6).

3 Remove the four (4) supports from the ODU and then mountthe No.1 ODU on the bracket with the six bolts (M6).

BOLTS

M6 BOLTM6 BOLT

SUPPORT

Page 140: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INSTALLATION

2-23

Chart 2-6 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

Cautions: 1. Fix the bolt in the following order: 1 → 3 → 2 or 3 → 1→ 2

2. First, tighten the six bolts temporarily. Next, tightenthem according to the decided torque.

4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for No.2 ODU.

5 Mount the antenna to the pole.

6 Connect the hybrid (HYB) to the antenna with eight boltsattached to the antenna.

Then, align the directions of the antenna waveguide flangeand the waveguide interface of HYB.

1 3

2

Page 141: Pasolink Plus

INSTALLATION ROI-S04053

2-24

Chart 2-6 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

HYB

BOLT

POLE

No.1 ODU

No.2 ODU

ANT

SMACONNECTOR

COAXIALCABLE*

Note: * Coaxial cable with SMA connector issupplied by NEC.

USING NEC HYB

Page 142: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INSTALLATION

2-25

Chart 2-6 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

7 Connect the cables between the HYB and ODUs with torquewrench (pay attention to the connecting torque in order notto break the connector screw).

HYB

BOLT

POLE

No.1 ODU

No.2 ODU

ANT

SMACONNECTOR

COAXIALCABLE*

Note: * Coaxial cable with SMA connector issupplied by NEC.

USING QUASAR HYB

Page 143: Pasolink Plus

INSTALLATION ROI-S04053

2-26

Chart 2-7 Pole Mounting Bracket, Reassembly

When the ODU is mounted on the opposite side of the pole, reassemble theODU to the right position by the following procedure.

Step Procedure

1 Loosen the two screws, remove the bracket from the polemounting type bracket.

2 Turn the pole mounting bracket as shown below.

U-BOLTS

SCREW

BRACKET

Page 144: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INSTALLATION

2-27

Chart 2-7 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

3 Mount the bracket removed in step 1 onto the pole mountingtype bracket with two screws as shown below.

4 Secure two screws.

WASHER

SPRING WASHER

SCREW

U-BOLTS

Page 145: Pasolink Plus

INSTALLATION ROI-S04053

2-28

Chart 2-8 11-38 GHz Band ODU Mounting Using NEC Hybrid

Step Procedure

SWITCHING V/H POLARIZATION

ANTENNA

Note: The antenna is set to V-polarization when shipped from thefactory.

1 If you switch to H polarization, loosen the four screws withthe allen key wrench and then rotate the antenna connectionunit, keeping the antenna stand horizontal.

Note: A large and a small gasket are included in the antenna package.Please use the large one (The small gasket is not used in directODU mount).

SCREWS ANTENNA CONNECTION UNIT

V POLARIZATION

SCREW

Page 146: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INSTALLATION

2-29

Chart 2-8 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

2 Check that the aperture part of the connection unit isrotated by 90 degrees, then fix it with the screws that wereloosened in step 1.

HYBRID

Note: The hybrid is set to V-polarization when shipped from the factory.

3 If you switch to H polarization, loosen two screws, rotate theantenna connection unit and put the hybrid (HYB)horizontally.

APERTURE

H POLARIZATION

Page 147: Pasolink Plus

INSTALLATION ROI-S04053

2-30

Chart 2-8 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

4 Check that aperture of the connection unit is rotated asshown below, then fix it with the two screws that wereloosened in step 3.

HYB

ANTENNACONNECTION UNIT

V POLARIZATION

GUIDE PIN

V POLARIZATION H POLARIZATION

SCREW (M2.6, 2EA)

Page 148: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INSTALLATION

2-31

Chart 2-8 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

MOUNTING

5 Tighten the M10 hex bolts to fix the clamp using a wrench.

NEW TYPE BRACKET

WASHERNUTLOCK

WASHER

AZIMUTHADJUSTMENT

ELEVATIONADJUSTMENT

OLD TYPE BRACKET

Page 149: Pasolink Plus

INSTALLATION ROI-S04053

2-32

Chart 2-8 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

6 Fix the HYB to the antenna by tightening them with the M6screws (four locations).

Note: The tightening torque is from 5.0 to 6.0 N·m.Be careful not to damage the O-ring(Antenna).

MOUNTING HOLE FORHYB

HOLE FOR GUIDE PIN

GUIDE PIN

ANT

FLAT WASHERM6 SCREWGUIDE PIN

O-ring

BLANKING PLATE

MOVE THE BLANKING PLATE

NEW TYPE BRACKET

Page 150: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INSTALLATION

2-33

Chart 2-8 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

Note: The tightening torque is from 5.0 to 6.0 N·m.Be careful not to damage the O-ring(Antenna).

MOUNTING HOLE FORHYB

HOLE FOR GUIDE PIN

O-RING

ANT

FLAT WASHERM6 SCREWGUIDE PIN

O-ring

BRANKING PLATE

MOVE THE BRANKING PLATE

OLD TYPE BRACKET

Page 151: Pasolink Plus

INSTALLATION ROI-S04053

2-34

Chart 2-8 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

7 Insert the O-rings to the two ODU ports of the HYB.

8 Fix the two ODUs respectively with hex screws (fourlocations) using the allen key wrench.

Note: Be careful not to damage the O-rings (Hybrid).

O-ring

ODU

ODU

ODU

O-ring

HYB

Page 152: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INSTALLATION

2-35

Chart 2-9 11-38 GHz Band ODU Mounting Using Quasar Hybrid

Step Procedure

SWITCHING V/H POLARIZATION

ANTENNA

Note: The antenna is set to V-polarization when shipped from thefactory.

1 If you switch to H polarization, loosen the four screws withthe allen key wrench and then rotate the antenna connectionunit, keeping the antenna stand horizontal.

Note: A large and a small gasket are included in antenna package.Please use large one (The small gasket is not used in direct ODUmount).

SCREWS ANTENNA CONNECTION UNIT

V POLARIZATION

SCREW

Page 153: Pasolink Plus

INSTALLATION ROI-S04053

2-36

Chart 2-9 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

2 Check that the aperture of the connection unit is rotated by90 degrees, then fix it with screws that were loosened in step1.

HYBRID

Note: The hybrid is set to V-polarization when shipped from the factory.

3 If you switch to H polarization, loosen two screws, rotate theantenna connection unit and put the HYB horizontally.

APERTURE PART

H POLARIZATION

Page 154: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INSTALLATION

2-37

Chart 2-9 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

4 Check that the aperture of the connection unit is rotated asshown below, then fix it with the two screws that wereloosened in step 3.

HYB

ANTENNACONNECTION UNIT

V POLARIZAION

GUIDE PIN

SCREW

V POLARIZATION

H POLARIZATION

Page 155: Pasolink Plus

INSTALLATION ROI-S04053

2-38

Chart 2-9 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

MOUNTING

5 Tighten the M10 hex bolts to fix the clamp using a wrench.

NEW TYPE BRACKET

WASHERNUTLOCK

WASHER

AZIMUTHADJUSTMENT

ELEVATIONADJUSTMENT

OLD TYPE BRACKET

Page 156: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INSTALLATION

2-39

Chart 2-9 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

6 Fix the HYB to the antenna by tightening them with the M6screws (four locations).

Note: The tightening torque is from 5.0 to 6.0 N·m.Be careful not to damage the O-ring(Antenna).

MOUNTING HOLE FORHYB

HOLE FOR GUIDE PIN

GUIDE PIN

HYBM6 SCREW

ODU PORT

MOVE THE BLANKING PLATE

NEW TYPE BRACKET

Page 157: Pasolink Plus

INSTALLATION ROI-S04053

2-40

Chart 2-9 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

Note: The tightening torque is from 5.0 to 6.0 N·m.Be careful not to damage the O-ring(Antenna).

MOUNTING HOLE FORHYB

HOLE FOR GUIDE PIN

O-RING

BLACKET

HYBM6 SCREW

ODU PORT

OLD TYPE BRACKET

MOVE THE BLANKING PLATE

Page 158: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INSTALLATION

2-41

Chart 2-9 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

7 Insert the O-rings to the ODU ports of the HYB.

8 Fix the two ODUs with hex screws (four locations) using theallen key wrench.

Note: Be careful not to damage the O-rings (Hybrid).

ODU

M6 SCREW

Page 159: Pasolink Plus

INSTALLATION ROI-S04053

2-42

Chart 2-10 11-38 GHz Band ODU Waveguide Connection

Step Procedure

1 Mount the waveguide to the ODU and fix the waveguide tothe ODU with four bolts.

Note: Be careful not to damage the O-ring.

BOLT (M4)

SPRING WASHER

WASHER O-RING

WAVEGUIDEWITH PBR( ) FLANGE

Page 160: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INSTALLATION

2-43

Chart 2-10 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

2 Mount the waveguide (WG) and taper WG to the antennaand fix the flexible WG, taper WG and antenna with screws.

Freq. Band

Antenna Flange Taper WG WG Taper WG Adapter

Flange

11 GHz PDR100 PDR100-PDR100 PDR100

13 GHz PBR120 UBR120 – PBR140 UBR140-UBR140 PBR140

15 GHz PBR140 UBR140-UBR140 PBR140

18 GHz PBR220 UBR220-UBR220 PBR220

23 GHz PBR220 UBR220-UBR220 PBR220

26 GHz PBR220 UBR220-UBR220 PBR220 – UBR260 PBR260

38 GHz PBR320 UBR320-UBR320 PBR320

ANTENNA

To ODU

TAPER WG(26 GHz Band only)

SCREW

Note: The flange type between Antenna and waveguide(WG) must be matched. If necessary, a suitable WGflange transition must be adapted. Refer to thecombination example.

TAPER WG(13 GHz Band only)

WG

Page 161: Pasolink Plus

INSTALLATION ROI-S04053

2-44

2.5.2 Demounting

For demounting the ODU (if necessary), use the following procedure.

Chart 2-11 ODU Demounting

Step Procedure

1 Remove the four (or six) fixed bolts from the ODU.

2 Then demount the ODU.

Note: When demounting the ODU with HYB (except for 6/7/8 GHzBand), mount the attached blanking plate to the demounted portof the hybrid to avoid RF power leaking from the hybrid and forwaterproofing.

BLANKING PLATE

MOUNTING BLANKING PLATE TO THE PORT

MOUNTING HOLE FOR BLANKING PLATE

QUASAR HYB

BLANKING PLATE

NEC HYB

Page 162: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INSTALLATION

2-45

2.6 Cable Termination

In this section, the list of tools and material and the method for cabletermination method are described. The following cables are described forreference.

• D-sub connector (refer to Chart 2-12)*• N-P connector of the L angle type (refer to Chart 2-13)**• N-P connector of the straight type (refer to Chart 2-14)**• Molex 5557-04R connector (refer to Chart 2-15)

Notes: 1. * Use D-sub connectors of less than 16 mm on height asillustrated below.

2. ** The difference between the No.1 channel IF cable lengthand the No.2 channel IF cable length is within 100 m.

The necessary tools and materials are summarized in Table 2-3.

HEIGHT

D-SUB CONNECTOR

Table 2-3 Tools and Material List

No. NAME REMARKS

1 Soldering Iron

2 Solder

3 Knife

4 Measure

5 Wire Stripper

6 Adjustable Wrench

7 Hand Crimping Tool

CL250-0012-2/CL250-0013-5

For D-Sub connector

57026-5000/57027-5000

For Molex connector

Page 163: Pasolink Plus

INSTALLATION ROI-S04053

2-46

Chart 2-12 Terminating Supervisory Cables with D-Sub Connector

Step Procedure

1 Strip back the cable sheath, taking care not to damage thebraided shield.

2 Fold back the braided shield (do not separate the strands)and trim it as shown.

3 Remove the insulation over a length of 4 mm from the end ofthe wire.

CONFORMABLEWIRE SOCKET CONTACT

AWG#20-24 :CD-PC-111

AWG#24-28 :CD-PC-121

50 mm

CABLE

WIRE

WIRE4 mm

Page 164: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INSTALLATION

2-47

Chart 2-12 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

4 Insert the cable into the socket contact.

5 The cable should be fitted so that insulation and bare wireare arranged as shown.

6 Insert the socket contact into the hand crimping tool.

CONFORMINGWIRE SOCKET CONTACT

AWG#20-24 :TC-CD-111

AWG#24-28 :TC-CD-121

WIRE SOCKET CONTACT

HAND CRIMPING TOOL(HRS TC-CD-111/TC-CD-121)

Page 165: Pasolink Plus

INSTALLATION ROI-S04053

2-48

Chart 2-12 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

7 Recheck that the wire position is as shown in step 5 beforecrimping the socket contact (see illustration at below).

8 Wind the metallic shield tape on the braided shield.

WIRE SIDE

SOCKET CONTACT

WIRE

METALLIC SHIELD TAPE

Page 166: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INSTALLATION

2-49

Chart 2-12 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

9 Set the cable into the plug case as shown in figure. Then, fitthe cable using the cable clamper and two screws.

CABLE CLAMPER

PLUG CASE

Page 167: Pasolink Plus

INSTALLATION ROI-S04053

2-50

Chart 2-12 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

10 Referring to circle A, fix the drain wire with screw.

11 Referring to circle B, insert each wire to the specifiedposition (refer to Table 2-4). Insert the socket contacts intothe upper and lower row positions while taking care that thesocket contacts are inserted the right way round.

CIRCLE A

SCREW

DRAIN WIRE

CIRCLE B

Page 168: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INSTALLATION

2-51

Chart 2-12 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

12 Fix the plug case with two screws, as shown in the figure.

SCREW

PLUG CASE

Page 169: Pasolink Plus

INSTALLATION ROI-S04053

2-52

Chart 2-13 Terminating Coaxial (IF Signal) with N-PConnector (L Angle Type)

Step Procedure

1 First fit the tying metal, washer and gasket on the cable.

2 Strip back the cable sheath, taking care not to damage thebraided shield, and fit the clamp.

3 Fold back the braided shield (separating the strands of thebraid) and trim it.

Note: Pay attention not to damage the plait.

4 Insert the ferrule.

GASKET WASHER TYING METAL

CABLE

CLAMP

9 mm

FERRULE

Page 170: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INSTALLATION

2-53

Chart 2-13 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

5 Fit the bush.

6 Cut the aluminium foil and inner insulator away along thebush and retain the inner conductor.

7 Taper the edge of the center conductor using a file as shownin the enlarged view below.

BUSH

Note :Pay attention not to letprotrusions and indents occur.

Page 171: Pasolink Plus

INSTALLATION ROI-S04053

2-54

Chart 2-13 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

8 Mount the contact onto the center conductor and mount theinsulator onto the contact.

9 Insert the cable into the shell.

10 Tighten the tying metal with wrench point by wrench(Tighten with torque 4 to 10 N·m)

INSULATOR CONTACT

WRENCH POINT

LESS THAN 0.1 mm(USUALLY NO GAPS)

Page 172: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INSTALLATION

2-55

Chart 2-14 Terminating Coaxial (IF Signal) Cables with N-PConnector (Straight Type)

Step Procedure

1 First fit the lock nut, washer and gasket on the cable asshown.

2 Strip back the cable sheath, taking care not to damage thebraided shield, and fit clamp A.

3 Fold back the braided shield (separating the strands of thebraid) and trim it.

4 Cut away the insulation from the center conductor and fitclamp B. Be sure not to cut or scratch the conductor whilestripping the insulation.

CABLE

LOCK NUT WASHER GASKET

CLAMP A

27 mm

4.0 mm CLAMP B

CUT

Page 173: Pasolink Plus

INSTALLATION ROI-S04053

2-56

Chart 2-14 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

5 Cut the center conductor. Taper the end of the centerconductor using a file as shown in the enlarged view below.

6 Mount the center contact onto the center conductor asshown.

7 Mount the insulation onto the center contact.

12 mm

1.5 mm

CENTER CONTACT

TAPERING SIDE

INSULATION

Page 174: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INSTALLATION

2-57

Chart 2-14 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

8 Insert the cable into the connector shell.

9 Tighten the lock nut.

CONNECTOR SHELL

LOCK NUT

Less than 1.5 mm

Page 175: Pasolink Plus

INSTALLATION ROI-S04053

2-58

Chart 2-15 Terminating Power Supply Cables with Molex Connector

Step Procedure

1 Remove 3.0 to 3.5 mm of insulation.

CABLE

AWG#16

Note: Do not bend this part.

POWER SUPPLY CABLE

3.0 to 3.5 mm

FOR 48 V, 1A

Page 176: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INSTALLATION

2-59

Chart 2-15 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

2 Set the socket contact to position 1 or 2 of the hand crimpingtool.

3 Squeeze the handle of the hand crimping tool, insert cableinto socket contact.

4 The cable should fit, so that insulation and bare wire arearranged as shown.

5 Squeeze the handle of the hand crimping tool until theratchet is released.

HAND CRIMPING TOOL57026-5000 Molexor 57027-5000( )

HAND CRIMPINGTOOL TYPE

57026-5000

57027-5000

OUTSIDE DIAMETER OF CABLE

φ 1.5 to 1.8φ 1.8 to 2.2φ 2.3 to 2.6φ 2.6 to 3.1

SETPOSITION

1212

12

INSULATION BARREL WIRE BARREL

WIRE STRIP LENGTH

Page 177: Pasolink Plus

INSTALLATION ROI-S04053

2-60

Chart 2-15 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

6 Insert the socket contacts into the power connector till theylock.

-48 V (or 0 V)

0 V (or +48V)POWER CONNECTOR

Page 178: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INSTALLATION

2-61

2.7 Cable and Terminal Connections

Set up as in Fig. 2-8 referring to the following connecting method.

(a) IF signal cableConnect the connector correctly and tighten it by turning thetightening ring clockwise.

Note: The difference between the No.1 channel IF cable lengthand the No.2 channel IF cable length should be within100m.

(b) Data signal cable and supervisory cableConnect the D-sub connector correctly and fix it with two screws(#4-40).

(c) Modular cableInsert the Modular connector correctly.

(d) Power supply cableInsert the Molex connector correctly.

Table 2-4 and Table 2-5 show pin assignment in the IDU and ODU.

Page 179: Pasolink Plus

INSTALLATION ROI-S04053

2-62

(This page is intentionally left blank.)

Page 180: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INSTALLATION

2-63/64

Fig. 2-8 Cable and Terminal Connections of IDU and ODU

ALM/AUX CALLRESET

IDU

STATUS

+

R SWEOW

PASOLINK

LAN CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

NE1 NE2 V11PNMS

LAN

ALM

TX

MAINT

SEL VFUSE (7.5A)

PWRIF IN/OUT

PWR +−

WARNING-43V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWERBEFORE DISCONNECTING

I/F CABLE

!

SEL VFUSE (7.5A)

PWRIF IN/OUT

PWR +−WARNING-43V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWERBEFORE DISCONNECTING

I/F CABLE

!

ODURX

G8538 MD UNIT

G8540 SW UNIT

G8538 MD UNIT

1

2

PNMT LCT EOW1 EOW2

CH1-CH8 IN/OUT

SC IN/OUT

CH9-CH16 WS IN/OUT

ALM

LAN DSC/WSIF IN/OUT

N-P CONNECTOR

MODULAR CONNECTOR

D-SUB CONNECTOR

D-SUB CONNECTOR

D-SUB CONNECTOR

MOLEX CONNECTOR

EXTERNALEQUIPMENT

POWERSUPPLY

DATA TERMINALEQUIPMENT

D-SUB CONNECTOR

Notes:1. ** Either (V.11 or 10 Base-T) can be selected.2. The difference between the No.1 channel IF cable length and the No.2 channel IF cable length is within 100m.

FG (M5)

POWERSUPPLY

IDU(OTHER ROUTE)

LCT

PNMT

MODULAR CONNECTOR

MODULAR CONNECTOR

MODULAR CONNECTOR

IDU(OTHER ROUTE)

MODULAR CONNECTOR

MODULAR CONNECTOR

PNMSMODULAR CONNECTOR **

EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT (WS) D-SUB CONNECTOR

N-P CONNECTOR

6/7/8 GHz BAND ODU 11-38 GHz BAND ODU

MOLEX CONNECTOR

MODULAR CONNECTOR

MODULAR CONNECTOR

Page 181: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INSTALLATION

2-65

Table 2-4 Interface Terminals and Jacks for IDU

Terminal/Jack Description

IF IN/OUT TX IF signal output to ODU and RX IF signal input from ODU

(N-J Connector) Warning: 1. Do not connect other cables to this connector,because the – 43 V DC power is superimposedon it.

2. Do not touch the connector before turning offpower switch.

CH 1 - CH 8 IN/OUT(D-sub Connector, 37 Pins)

2.048 Mbps HDB-3 coded data input/output(CH 1 to CH 8)

Pins 4 (+) and 23 (−) Channel (CH) 8 input

Pins 6 (+) and 25 (−) CH7 input

Pins 8 (+) and 27 (−) CH6 input

Pins 10 (+) and 29 (−) CH5 input

Pins 12 (+) and 31 (−) CH4 input

Pins 14 (+) and 33 (−) CH3 input

Pins 16 (+) and 35 (−) CH2 input

Pins 18 (+) and 37 (−) CH1 input

Pins 3 (+) and 22 (−) CH8 output

Pins 5 (+) and 24 (−) CH7 output

Pins 7 (+) and 26 (−) CH6 output

Pins 9 (+) and 28 (−) CH5 output

Pins 11 (+) and 30 (−) CH4 output

Pins 13 (+) and 32 (−) CH3 output

Pins 15 (+) and 34 (−) CH2 output

Pins 17 (+) and 36 (−) CH1 output

Pin 19 Ground

CH 9 to CH 16 WS IN/OUT(D-sub Connector, 37 Pins)

2.048 Mbps HDB-3 coded data and wayside signal input/output

Pins 2 (+) and 21 (−) Wayside (WS) signal input

Pins 4 (+) and 23 (−) CH16 input

Page 182: Pasolink Plus

INSTALLATION ROI-S04053

2-66

Pins 6 (+) and 25 (−) CH15 input

Pins 8 (+) and 27 (−) CH14 input

Pins 10 (+) and 29 (−) CH13 input

Pins 12 (+) and 31 (−) CH12 input

Pins 14 (+) and 33 (−) CH11 input

Pins 16 (+) and 35 (−) CH10 input

Pins 18 (+) and 37 (−) CH9 input

Pins 1 (+) and 20 (−) WS signal output

Pins 3 (+) and 22 (−) CH16 output

Pins 5 (+) and 24(−) CH15 output

Pins 7 (+) and 26(−) CH14 output

Pins 9 (+) and 28 (−) CH13 output

Pins 11 (+) and 30 (−) CH12 output

Pins 13 (+) and 32 (−) CH11 output

Pins 15 (+) and 34 (−) CH10 output

Pins 17 (+) and 36 (−) CH 9 output

Pin 19 Ground

PNMT(Modular Connector)

Pasolink network management terminal (PNMT) data input/output (RS-232C)

Pin B1 PNMT DCD

Pin B2 PNMT TXD

Pin B3 PNMT RXD

Pin B4 PNMT DSR

Pin B5 Ground

Pin B6 PNMT DTR

Pin B7 PNMT CTS

Pin B8 PNMT RTS

Table 2-4 Interface Terminals and Jacks for IDU (Cont’d)

Terminal/Jack Description

Page 183: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INSTALLATION

2-67

LCT(Modular Connector)

Local craft terminal (LCT) data input/output (RS-232C)

Pin D1 N.C

Pin D2 LCT TXD

Pin D3 LCT RXD

Pin D4 N.C

Pin D5 Ground

Pin D6 N.C

Pin D7 LCT CTS

Pin D8 LCT RTS

EOW1(Modular Connector)

Engineering orderwire (EOW)1 signal extension terminal for back-to-back connection between IDUs (VF)

Pin F1 EXT EOW1 input (+)

Pin F2 EXT EOW1 input (−)

Pin F3 EXT CALL1 input

Pin F4 EXT EOW1 output (+)

Pin F5 EXT EOW1 output (−)

Pin F6 Ground

Pin F7 EXT CALL1 output

Pin F8 Ground

EOW2(Modular Connector)

EOW2 signal extension terminal for back-to-back connection between IDUs (VF)

Pin J1 EXT EOW2 output (+)

Pin J2 EXT EOW2 output (−)

Pin J3 EXT CALL2 output

Pin J4 EXT EOW2 input (+)

Pin J5 EXT EOW2 input (−)

Pin J6 Ground

Table 2-4 Interface Terminals and Jacks for IDU (Cont’d)

Terminal/Jack Description

Page 184: Pasolink Plus

INSTALLATION ROI-S04053

2-68

Pin J7 EXT CALL2 input

Pin J8 Ground

NE1(Modular Connector)

Pasolink network management system (PNMS) data input/output for back-to-back connection between IDUs (RS-485)

Pin A1 NE1 TXD+

Pin A2 NE1 TXD−

Pin A3 NE1 RXD+

Pin A4 NE1 CK+

Pin A5 NE1 CK−

Pin A6 NE1 RXD−

Pin A7 Ground

Pin A8 Ground

NE2(Modular Connector)

PNMS data input/output for back-to-back connection between IDUs (RS-485)

Pin C1 NE2 TXD+

Pin C2 NE2 TXD−

Pin C3 NE2 RXD+

Pin C4 N.C

Pin C5 N.C

Pin C6 NE2 RXD−

Pin C7 Ground

Pin C8 Ground

PNMS V11(Modular Connector)

PNMS data (V11) input/output

Pin E1 NMS V TX+

Pin E2 NMS V TX−

Pin E3 NMS V RX+

Pin E4 N.C

Table 2-4 Interface Terminals and Jacks for IDU (Cont’d)

Terminal/Jack Description

Page 185: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INSTALLATION

2-69

Pin E5 N.C

Pin E6 NMS V RX−

Pin E7 Ground

Pin E8 Ground

PNMS LAN(Modular Connector)

PNMS data (LAN) input/output

Pin H1 NMS T TX+

Pin H2 NMS T TX−

Pin H3 NMS T RX+

Pin H4 N.C

Pin H5 N.C

Pin H6 NMS T RX−

Pin H7 N.C

Pin H8 N.C

LAN CH1(Modular Connector)

Local area network (LAN) (CH1) signal input/output of 10BASE-T (cross/straight can be set by S7 on the Front Board (see 2.3 (Data Input/Output lmpedance and LAN Cable Selection) in chapter 2))STRAIGHT CROSS

Pin A1 LAN1 TX+ LAN1 RX+

Pin A2 LAN1 TX− LAN1 RX−

Pin A3 LAN1 RX+ LAN1 TX+

Pin A6 LAN1 RX− LAN1 TX−

LAN CH2(Modular Connector)

LAN (CH2) signal input/output of 10BASE-T (cross/straight can be set by S8 on the Front Board (see 2.3 (Data Input/Output lmpedance and LAN Cable Selection) in chapter 2))STRAIGHT CROSS

Pin B1 LAN2 TX+ LAN2 RX+

Pin B2 LAN2 TX− LAN2 RX−

Pin B3 LAN2 RX+ LAN2 TX+

Table 2-4 Interface Terminals and Jacks for IDU (Cont’d)

Terminal/Jack Description

Page 186: Pasolink Plus

INSTALLATION ROI-S04053

2-70

Pin B6 LAN2 RX− LAN2 TX−

LAN CH3(Modular Connector)

LAN (CH3) signal input/output of 10BASE-T (cross/straight can be set by S9 on the Front Board (see 2.3 (Data Input/Output lmpedance and LAN Cable Selection) in chapter 2))STRAIGHT CROSS

Pin C1 LAN3 TX+ LAN3 RX+

Pin C2 LAN3 TX− LAN3 RX−

Pin C3 LAN3 RX+ LAN3 TX+

Pin C6 LAN3 RX− LAN3 TX−

LAN CH4(Modular Connector)

LAN (CH4) signal input/output of 10BASE-T (cross/straight can be set by S10 on the Front Board (see 2.3 (Data Input/Output lmpedance and LAN Cable Selection) in chapter 2))STRAIGHT CROSS

Pin D1 LAN4 TX+ LAN4 RX+

Pin D2 LAN4 TX− LAN4 RX−

Pin D3 LAN4 RX+ LAN4 TX+

Pin D6 LAN4 RX− LAN4 TX−

LAN DSC/WS(Modular Connector)

LAN DSC or WS signal input/output of 10BASE-T (cross/straight can be set by S6 on the Front Board (see 2.3 (Data Input/Output lmpedance and LAN Cable Selection) in chapter 2))STRAIGHT CROSS

Pin 1 L TX+ L RX+

Pin 2 L TX− L RX−

Pin 3 L RX+ L TX+

Pin 6 L RX− L TX−

SC IN/OUT(D-sub Connector, 37 Pins)

Service channel data input/output

Pins 1 (+) and 20 (–) V11 clock (CLK) 2 output

Pins 2 (+) and 21 (–) V11 frame plus (FP) 2 output

Pins 3 (+) and 22 (–) V11 output 2

Table 2-4 Interface Terminals and Jacks for IDU (Cont’d)

Terminal/Jack Description

Page 187: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INSTALLATION

2-71

Pins 4 (+) and 23 (–) V11 input 2

Pins 5 (+) and 24 (–) V11 FP 2 input

Pins 6 (+) and 25 (–) V11 CLK 2 input

Pins 11 (+) and 30 (–) V11 CLK 1 output

Pins 12 (+) and 31 (–) V11 FP 1 output

Pins 13 (+) and 32 (–) V11 output 1

Pins 14 (+) and 33 (–) V11 input 1

Pins 15 (+) and 34 (–) V11 FP 1 input

Pins 16 (+) and 35 (–) V11 CLK 1 input

Pins 17 (+) and 36 (–) Voice frequency (VF) output

Pins 18 (+) and 37 (–) VF input

Pins 7 (COM) and 26 (NO)

Cluster (CLSTR) alarm 2 outputNormal state : OpenAlarm/Event state : Closed

Pins 9 (COM) and 28 (NO)

CLSTR alarm 1 outputNormal state : OpenAlarm/Event state : Closed

Pins 8 (+) and 27 (–) CLSTR alarm 2 inputNormal state : OpenAlarm/Event state : Closed

Pins 10 (+) and 29 (–) CLSTR alarm 1 inputNormal state : OpenAlarm/Event state : Closed

Pin 19 Ground

ALM(D-sub Connector, 25 Pins)

Alarm signal output

Pins 25 (COM), 12 (NC) and 13 (NO) RL1

Maintenance alarm outputBetween Between

Pins 25 and 12 Pins 25 and 13Normal state : Closed OpenAlarm state : Open Closed

Table 2-4 Interface Terminals and Jacks for IDU (Cont’d)

Terminal/Jack Description

Page 188: Pasolink Plus

INSTALLATION ROI-S04053

2-72

Pins 11 (COM), 23 (NC) and 24 (NO) RL2

Power alarm outputBetween Between

Pins 11 and 23 Pins 11 and 24Normal state : Closed OpenAlarm state : Open Closed

Pins 9 (COM), 21 (NC) and 22 (NO) RL3

CPU alarm outputBetween Between

Pins 9 and 21 Pins 9 and 22Normal state : Closed OpenAlarm state : Open Closed

Pins 20 (COM), 7 (NC) and 8 (NO) RL4

ODU alarm output *1Between Between

Pins 20 and 7 Pins 20 and 8Normal state : Closed OpenAlarm/Event state : Open Closed

Pins 18 (COM), 5 (NC) and 6 (NO) RL5

IDU alarm output *1Between Between

Pins 18 and 5 Pins 18 and 6Normal state : Closed OpenAlarm/Event state : Open Closed

Pins 4 (COM), 16 (NC) and 17 (NO) RL6

BER alarm output *1Between Between

Pins 4 and 16 Pins 4 and 17Normal state : Closed OpenAlarm/Event state : Open Closed

Pins 15 (COM), 2 (NC) and 3 (NO) RL7

Main interface (INTFC) signal/CLK loss alarm output *1Between Between

Pins 15 and 2 Pins 15 and 3Normal state : Closed OpenAlarm/Event state : Open Closed

Pins 1,10,14 and 19) Ground

ALM/AUX(D-sub Connector, 25 Pins)

Alarm and transmission network surveillance auxiliary input/output

Pins 1 (+) and 14 (−) House Keeping (HK)1 alarm input *2Normal state : OpenAlarm/Event state : Closed

Table 2-4 Interface Terminals and Jacks for IDU (Cont’d)

Terminal/Jack Description

Page 189: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INSTALLATION

2-73

Pins 2 (+) and 15 (−) HK2 alarm input *2 Normal state : Open

Alarm/Event state : Closed

Pins 3 (+) and 16 (−) HK3 alarm input *2 Normal state : Open

Alarm/Event state : Closed

Pins 4 (+) and 17 (−) HK4 alarm input *2 Normal state : Open

Alarm/Event state : Closed

Pins 5 (+) and 18 (−) HK5 alarm input *2 Normal state : Open

Alarm/Event state : Closed

Pins 6 (+) and 19 (−) HK6 alarm input *2 Normal state : Open

Alarm/Event state : Closed

Pins 7 (COM), 20 (NC) and 21 (NO) RL11*3

House keeping (HK)1 control output*1 or equipment alarm output *4

Between BetweenPins 7 and 20 Pins 7 and 21

Normal state : Closed OpenAlarm/Event state : Open Closed

Pins 22 (COM), 8 (NC) and 9 (NO) RL10*3

HK2 control output *1 or equipment alarm output *4Between Between

Pins 22 and 8 Pins 22 and 9Normal state : Closed OpenAlarm/Event state : Open Closed

Pins 10 (COM), 23 (NC) and 24 (NO) RL9*3

HK3 control output *1 or equipment alarm output *4Between Between

Pins 10 and 23 Pins 10 and 24Normal state : Closed OpenAlarm/Event state : Open Closed

Pins 25 (COM), 11 (NC) and 12 (NO) RL8*3

HK4 control output *1 or equipment alarm output *4Between Between

Pins 25 and 11 Pins 25 and 12Normal state : Closed OpenAlarm/Event state : Open Closed

Pin 13 Ground

Table 2-4 Interface Terminals and Jacks for IDU (Cont’d)

Terminal/Jack Description

Page 190: Pasolink Plus

INSTALLATION ROI-S04053

2-74

Notes:1. *1 This is the factory setting (default setting).2. *2 Resistance of opened relay terminal is more than 200

kohms. One of closed relay terminal is less than 50 ohms.3. *3 The relay is rated at 0.2A.4. *4 These alarm items can be set by the LCT as shown in Table

2-2. Alarms may be assigned to RL4 to RL11.5. *5 Optional.

FG Frame ground

G Wrist band ground

SEL V(Molex M5557-4R Connector, 4 Pins)

–36 to –60 VDC (or +36 to +60 VDC)/ –20 to –60 VDC (or +20 to +60 VDC) *5 power input

Pins 1 and 3 0 V (or +48 V)/0 V (or +24 V) *5

Pins 2 and 4 –48 V (or 0 V)/–24 V (or 0 V) *5

Table 2-4 Interface Terminals and Jacks for IDU (Cont’d)

Terminal/Jack Description

Table 2-5 Interface Terminals and Jacks for ODU

Terminal/Jack Description

IF IN/OUT(N-J Connector)

TX IF signal input and RX IF signal output

Warning: Do not disconnect the coaxial cable while theIDU is powered on.

FG Frame ground

RF IN/OUT(6/7/8 GHz : SMA)(11 GHz : PBR-100)(13/15 GHz : PBR-140)(18/23 GHz : PBR-220)(26 GHz : PBR-260)(38 GHz : PBR-320)

RF signal input/output from/to antenna

Page 191: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INSTALLATION

2-75

2.8 Frame Grounding

In mounting the IDU and ODU, perform frame grounding. The location ofthe frame grounding in each IDU and ODU is shown in Fig. 2-9, and theconnection for frame grounding is shown in Fig. 2-10.

Note: Connect the Frame Ground (FG) terminal on the IDU to themounting rack with the earth cable. In addition, connect themounting rack to the indoor earth terminal with the earth cableand connect the FG terminal on the ODU to the ground (refer toFig. 2-10).

Fig. 2-9 Location of Frame Ground

IDU

IFL FG RX LEVMON

6/7/8 GHz ODU

FG

FG

(BOTTOM VIEW)

FG

11-38 GHz ODU

ALM/AUX CALLRESET

IDU

STATUS

+

R SWEOW

PASOLINK

LAN CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

NE1 NE2 V11PNMS

LAN

ALM

TX

MAINT

SEL VFUSE (7.5A)

PWRIF IN/OUT

PWR +−

WARNING-43V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWERBEFORE DISCONNECTING

I/F CABLE

!

SEL VFUSE (7.5A)

PWRIF IN/OUT

PWR +−WARNING-43V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWERBEFORE DISCONNECTING

I/F CABLE

!

ODURX

G8538 MD UNIT

G8540 SW UNIT

G8538 MD UNIT

1

2

PNMT LCT EOW1 EOW2

CH1-CH8 IN/OUT

SC IN/OUT

CH9-CH16 WS IN/OUT

ALM

LAN DSC/WS

Page 192: Pasolink Plus

INSTALLATION ROI-S04053

2-76

Fig. 2-10 Connection for Frame Grounding (1/2)

EARTH LINE

INDOOR EARTH TERMINAL

IDU

ODU

COAXIAL CABLE

PROTECT AREA

LIGHTNING RODOUTDOOR EARTH TERMINAL(EXISTING OR CUSTOMER SUPPLIED)

EARTH LINE

GROUNDLEVEL

Cautions: 1. Install the ODU within the area protected by lightning rod.2. To avoid surge currents caused by lightning circulating in the equipment

earth system, connect the equipment earth system (frame ground) toground of the lightning rod at ground level.

RACK

Page 193: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INSTALLATION

2-77

Fig. 2-10 Connection for Frame Grounding (2/2)

LIGHTNING ROD

EARTH LINE

ODU

FG

EARTH LINE*

COAXIAL CABLE

INDOOR EARTH

GROUNDLEVEL

IDU

TERMINAL

(Grounding-resistance:less than 10 Ω)

Note: * NEC recommends that the frame ground of ODU should be connected to the earth line as shown above.EP : Earthing Point of towerFG : Frame Ground terminal

ISOLATED FROMTOWER(Grounding-resistance:less than 10 Ω) (Grounding-resistance of tower:

less than 10 Ω)

Grounding cable for ODU should be connected to the nearest EP of the tower.

EP

RACK

Page 194: Pasolink Plus

INSTALLATION ROI-S04053

2-78

2.9 Waterproof Protection

After cable connection, the following part should be wrapped by self-bonding tape for waterproof (see Fig. 2-11).

Fig. 2-11 Location of Connector for Waterproof (1/2)

Note: The self-bonding tape should be prepared bycustomer.

RF IN/OUT

IF IN/OUT

CABLE

SELF-BONDING TAPE

ODU

CABLE

6/7/8 GHz Band ODU

Page 195: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INSTALLATION

2-79

Fig. 2-11 Location of Connector for Waterproof (2/2)

Note: The self-bonding tape should be prepared by customer.

This part should be wrapped by self-bonding tape for waterproof.

ODU

IF CABLE

SELF-BONDING TAPE

ODU

IFL CONNECTOR

SELF-BONDING TAPE

ODU

IF CABLE

IN CASE OF L ANGLE

11 - 38 GHz Band ODU

Page 196: Pasolink Plus

INSTALLATION ROI-S04053

2-8080 pages

(This page is intentionally left blank.)

Page 197: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INITIAL LINE UP

3-1

3. INITIAL LINE UP

This paragraph provides instructions for the initial lineup of theequipment. Included is information on start-up, shut-down, IDU and ODUequipment setting, antenna orientation and lineup test for the equipment.

If orderwire communication is required, connect the X0818A OW/RXLEV Monitor to the ODU. The OW/RX LEV Monitor operates on a drybattery (6F22/9V).

Notes: 1. Insert the battery with correct polarity.

2. When the OW/RX LEV Monitor will not be used for extendedperiods of time, remove the battery to avoid damage frombattery leakage and corrosion.

3. Set the OW switch to ON when the orderwire will be used.When the OW indicator is not lit even though the OW switchis set to ON, replace the battery since the battery hadbecome weak.

3.1 Start-up

The start-up procedure for the equipment is shown in Chart 3-1.

Warning: 1. After turning ON the equipment, wait at least 1 minutebefore turning it OFF again. Repeatedly turning thepower ON and OFF within a short interval may causethe IDU to fail.

2. While the power supply is ON, do not remove/connectthe power supply connector. Otherwise, the DC-DCCONV may fail.

3. The -43 V DC power is superimposed on the centreconductor of the IF cable between the IDU and theODU. If the IF cable is kept short-circuited for aprolonged period, the DC-DC CONV may fail.

Page 198: Pasolink Plus

INITIAL LINE UP ROI-S04053

3-2

Chart 3-1 Start-up

Caution: Do not apply to the equipment a voltage that varies sharply.The equipment may operate improperly.

Apparatus:Suitable ScrewdriverDigital Multimeter

Step Procedure

Note: The ODU power is supplied by the IDU.

1 Check that the No.1 CH SEL V in voltage is between –36 to–60 V (or +36 to +60 V)/−20 to −60 V (or +20 to +60 V) withthe digital multimeter, before connecting the powerconnector as shown below to the No.1 channel IDU (see Fig.3-1),

2 Check that the IF cable between the IDU and the ODU isconnected,

3 Turn on the No.1 PWR switch on the IDU (see Fig. 3-1),

4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for No.2 channel,

5 Confirm that No.1 PWR indicator on the IDU is lighted.

POWER SUPPLY

24 3

10 V (or +48 V)/0 V (or +24 V)

–48 V (or 0 V)/–24 V (or 0 V)

Page 199: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INITIAL LINE UP

3-3

Fig. 3-1 Connector, Power Switch and Indicator Location

3.2 Shut-down

The shut-down procedure for the equipment is shown in Chart 3-2.

Warning: After turning ON the equipment, wait at least 1 minutebefore turning it OFF again. Repeatedly turning the powerON and OFF with in a short interval may cause the IDU tofail.

Chart 3-2 Shut-down

Step Procedure

1 Turn off the No.1 or No.2 CH PWR switch on the IDU (seeFig. 3-1).

3.3 Initial Setting

The setting of the IDU/ODU is performed by the LCT according to Table3-1.

CALLRESET

IDU

STATUS

+

R SW

EOW

ALM

PASOLINK

TX

MAINT

ODURX

G8540 SW UNIT

1

2

SEL VFUSE (7.5A)

PWR

PWR +−

G8538 MD UNIT

No.1PWR SWITCH

No.1 PWRNo.1SEL V

No.2PWR SWITCH

No.2 PWRNo.2SEL V

SEL VFUSE (7.5A)

PWR

PWR +−

G8538 MD UNIT

Page 200: Pasolink Plus

INITIAL LINE UP ROI-S04053

3-4

The communication/serial port settings of the personal computer used aslocal craft terminal (LCT) is listed below.

• Bits per second: 19200• Data bits: 8• Parity: None• Stop bits: 1• Flow control: Hardware• Emulation: VT100 Video Terminal• Transmission: Add CR at end of line : No

(send line ends with line feeds:No)*Local echo : No(Eco typed characters locally : No)*

• Receiving: CR: No(Append line feeds to incoming line feeds: No)*Return on the right edge: Yes(Wrap lines that exceed terminal width : yes)*Force incoming data to 7-bit ASCIII: No

* Windows Hyper Terminal settings.Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademark ofMicrosoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.

These display screens are shown in Fig. 3-2.

Notes:1. For operating the LCT properly, do not use the arrow keys“→, ↑ , etc.” (as generates the ESC code) instead of the ESCkey.

2. The operation check by Hyper Terminal attached to Windowsis performed by Windows 95/98. When using the HyperTerminal mode of Windows 2000, the characters may not bedisplayed chorrectly.

Table 3-1 Initial Setting Items

Item Remarks

1. System Configuration Setting Chart 3-3

2. Date and Time Setting Chart 3-4

3. Provisioning Setting Chart 3-5

4. Relay/House Keeping Setting Chart 3-6

Page 201: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INITIAL LINE UP

3-5

The cable connector pin assignments are shown in Fig. 3-3. The length ofthe RS-232C cable between the personal computer and IDU should be lessthan 15 m.

Fig. 3-2 Display Screens

Note: Please refer to the above screenshots as an examplefor the Hyper Terminal Setting.

Page 202: Pasolink Plus

INITIAL LINE UP ROI-S04053

3-6

Fig. 3-3 RS-232C Cable Pin Assignment

Fig. 3-4 LCT Setup

SIGNALNAME

PINNo.

87654321

RTSCTSDTRGNDDSRRXDTXDCD

LCT

SIGNALNAME

PINNo.

87654321

CTSRTSDTRGNDDSRTXDRXDDCD

IDU SIDE LCT CONNECTOR

MODULAR CONNECTORD-SUB CONNECTOR(9 Pins)

ALM/AUX CALLRESET

IDU

STATUS

+

R SWEOW

PASOLINK

LAN CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

NE1 NE2 V11PNMS

LAN

ALM

TX

MAINT

SEL VFUSE (7.5A)

PWRIF IN/OUT

PWR +−

WARNING-43V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWERBEFORE DISCONNECTING

I/F CABLE

!

SEL VFUSE (7.5A)

PWRIF IN/OUT

PWR +−WARNING-43V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWERBEFORE DISCONNECTING

I/F CABLE

!

ODURX

G8538 MD UNIT

G8540 SW UNIT

G8538 MD UNIT

1

2

PNMT LCT EOW1 EOW2

CH1-CH8 IN/OUT

SC IN/OUT

CH9-CH16 WS IN/OUT

ALM

LAN DSC/WS

LCT

RS-232C CABLE

LCT

Page 203: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INITIAL LINE UP

3-7

Chart 3-3 System Configuration Setting

This chart describes the procedure for setting the system configuration.The items to be set are as follows:

• Equipment Configuration• Main Interface• RF Frequency• TX Power Control• Frame ID

Setting of the system configuration should be performed in followingorder.

Step Procedure

1 Referring to Fig. 3-4, connect the RS-232C cable betweenthe LCT and the IDU,

2 Open the Terminal software (eg; Hyper Terminal),

3 Enter Login name “Admin” and press the “Enter” key,

4 Enter password “12345678” and press the “Enter” key,

Login : AdminPassword : ********

--- NEC PDH RADIO VER. X.XX.XX --- 0. Logout 1. Alarm / Status 2. Performance Monitor 3. Provisioning Data 4. System Configuration 5. Inventory Data 6. Relay / House Keeping 7. MaintenanceEnter Selection :

Page 204: Pasolink Plus

INITIAL LINE UP ROI-S04053

3-8

Chart 3-3 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

5 Press the “4” key for setting the System Configuration andpress the “Enter” key,

Following is an explanation of each item under the SystemConfiguration menu.

• Display Radio Equipment ConfigurationSelects to display radio equipment configuration.

• Setup Radio Equipment ConfigurationSelects to set radio equipment configuration.

6 Press the “2” key for setting the Equipment Configurationand press the “Enter” key,

Selects the system from the following two choices.1+0 (Expandable) : Selects this if the system has currently on

protection unit and the system can beexpanded from 1+0 to a 1+1 system inthe future.

Note: No.1 channel MD UNIT is used inthe system and No.2 channel MDUNIT is not used.

1+1 (Hot standby) : Selects this for 1+1 Hot-standby system.Note: In 1+1 Hot-standby system, No.1

and No.2 channel ODUs willautomatically have the sameselected settings.

Enter Selection : 4

--- System Configuration --- 1. Display Radio Equipment Configuration 2. Setup Radio Equipment ConfigurationEnter Selection :

--- Equipment Configuration --- 1. 1+0 (Expandable) 2. 1+1 (Hot Standby)Current Setting : 1Enter Selection ([RET] = No Change) :

Page 205: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INITIAL LINE UP

3-9

Chart 3-3 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

7 After setting, press “Enter” key for setting the MainInterface,

The interface requirement of main signal is selected from thefollowing two systems.8*2 MB: 2 MB × 8 system.16*2 MB: 2 MB × 16 system

8 After setting, press the “Enter” key for setting the RFFrequency,

It is necessary to set frequencies of the No.1 ODUs. Whenthe transmitting frequency is set, the receiving frequency isautomatically set. For 6/7/8 GHz band ODUs, the TXfrequency setting must be the same as that indicated on thelabel attached on the side of the ODU. For the 11-38 GHzband ODUs, the actual transmit frequency setting that isentered should be within the TX frequency band of the ODU(see Appendix in Description section). For 11-38 GHz bandODUs used, the frequency setting should be at least + 21MHz away from the band’s “Start” frequency and at least −21 MHz away from the band’s “Stop” frequency. The band’s“Start” and “Stop” frequency are displayed on the LCT.

--- Main Interface --- 1. 8*2MB 2. 16*2MBCurrent Setting : 1Enter Selection ([RET] = No Change) :

--- RF Frequency ---Current TX Frequency = XXXXX.XXX[MHz]Current RX Frequency = XXXXX.XXX[MHz]Start TX Frequency = XXXXX.XXX[MHz]Stop TX Frequency = XXXXX.XXX[MHz]Shift Frequency = XXXXX.XXX[MHz]

Enter TX Frequency ([RET] = No Change) :

Page 206: Pasolink Plus

INITIAL LINE UP ROI-S04053

3-10

Chart 3-3 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

9 After setting the RF frequency, press the “Enter” key.When prompted “Are You Sure? (Y/N)”, press the “Y” andpress the “Enter” key,

An operation mode of transmission power control is selectedfrom the following two modes.ATPC : Automatic Transmission Power ControlMTPC : Manual Transmission Power Control

Note: Set the MTPC mode during antenna orientation. WhenATPC operation is required, set to the ATPC modeafter antenna orientation has been completed.

10 After setting, press the “Enter” key for setting the FrameID,

The frame ID is set in order to discriminate the signal. As asignal with a different ID cannot be received, the ID of theopposite station should be the same. In the 1+1 Hot standbysystem, both No.1 and No.2 channels should have the sameID. The number of IDs which can be set up is eight; ID1through ID8.

11 After setting the Frame ID, press the “Enter” key. Whenprompted “Are You Sure? (Y/N)”, press the “Y” and pressthe “Enter” key,

12 After setting the System Configuration, proceed to Chart 3-4 for time setting.

--- TX Power Control --- 1. MTPC 2. ATPCCurrent Setting : 1Enter Selection ([RET] = No Change) :

--- Frame ID --- 1. ID1 2. ID2 3. ID3 4. ID4 5. ID5 6. ID6 7. ID7 8. ID8Current Setting : 1Enter Selection ([RET] = No Change) :

Page 207: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INITIAL LINE UP

3-11

Chart 3-4 Date and Time Setting

This chart describes the procedure for setting date and time. When theIDU is turned off for an extended period (i.e. approx. 1 week), theequipment time setting could have been cleared. In such case, verify andre-enter the time setting after turning on the IDU.

Step Procedure

1 Press the “ESC” key to go back to the following menu,

2 Press the “7” key for Maintenance and press the “Enter”key,

3 Press the “4” key for setting the Set Calendar and press the“Enter” key,

Password : ********

--- NEC PDH RADIO VER. X.XX.XX --- 0. Logout 1. Alarm / Status 2. Performance Monitor 3. Provisioning Data 4. System Configuration 5. Inventory Data 6. Relay / House Keeping 7. MaintenanceEnter Selection :

Enter Selection : 7

--- Maintenance --- 1. MAINT Mode (OFF) 2. Control 3. Reset CPU 4. Set Calendar 5. Password Setting 6. Program DownloadEnter Selection : 4

--- Set Calendar ---Enter Year : 2001Enter Month : 2Enter Day : 28Enter Hour : 18Enter Min : 20Enter Sec : 40

Success !!

Page 208: Pasolink Plus

INITIAL LINE UP ROI-S04053

3-12

Chart 3-4 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

4 Set all items according to display of the LCT,

5 After setting the time, proceed to Chart 3-5 for theProvisioning setting.

Page 209: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INITIAL LINE UP

3-13

Chart 3-5 Provisioning Setting

This chart describes the procedure for setting the provisioning data.Setting items are as follows:

• Main Channel Usage• BER Threshold• Sub Interface• SC Assignment• MTPC TX PWR• ATPC Range• RX Threshold• Additional ATT• ODU ALM MODE• TX SW Priority• RX SW Priority• Channel Usage Error• BER AIS

Step Procedure

1 Press the “ESC” key to go back to the following menu,

2 Press the “3” key for Provisioning Data and press the“Enter” key,

Following is an explanation of each item of Provisioning item.

• Display Current DataSelects to display current provisioning data.

• Set Provisioning DataSelects to set provisioning data.

Password : ********

--- NEC PDH RADIO VER. X.XX.XX --- 0. Logout 1. Alarm / Status 2. Performance Monitor 3. Provisioning Data 4. System Configuration 5. Inventory Data 6. Relay / House Keeping 7. MaintenanceEnter Selection :

--- Provisioning Data --- 1. Display Current Data 2. Set Provisioning DataEnter Selection :

Page 210: Pasolink Plus

INITIAL LINE UP ROI-S04053

3-14

Chart 3-5 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

The factory settings are also listed in the following table. Tochange these settings, proceed to the following step.

Notes: 1. * In the factory setting, the TX output power is 25 dBlower than the standard level since the MTPC TX PWRis set to −25 dB. If the standard output level is required,set MTPC TX PWR to 0 dB.

2. Provisioning items that cannot be set for the selectedoperating mode are not displayed on the LCT.

ItemFactory Setting

RemarksHS System

Main Channel Usage 2M Used

10BASE-T Used When main 10BASE-T is mounted asoption.

BER Threshold 1E-4

Sub Interface WS: Used When WS is mounted as option.

10BASE-T DSC/WS: DSC When main 10BASE-T is mounted asoption.

SC Assignment EasyVF1: DSC2

DSC 9.6KB-1*: DSC3

DSC 9.6KB-2**: DSC4

Cluster ALM: Not Used

10BASE-T DSC: DSC4***

*When the DSC 64 KB is mounted, set toDSC3 Co-directional.**When the DSC 64 KB is mounted, setto DSC4 Co-directional.

***When the 10BASE-T/WS settingunder Sub Interface is “used”.

MTPC TX PWR −25 dB*

ATPC Range (max. to min.) 0 to −25 dB

RX Threshold −55 dBm

Additional ATT 0 dB

ODU ALM MODE Hold

TX SW Priority Non-priority

RX SW Priority Non-priority

Channel Usage Error Report

BER AIS On

Page 211: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INITIAL LINE UP

3-15

Chart 3-5 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

3 Press the “2” key and press the “Enter” key,

Note: Setting items displayed on the LCT depend on settingcondition of “System Configuration”.

4 Press the “1” key for setting the Main Channel Usage andpress the “Enter” key. Then select the channel number to beset,

The main channel signal to be used is selected from thefollowing items.Not Used : If there is a channel which is not used, it will

surely be set to “Not Used”.2M Used : When the 2.048 Mbps signal is required, the “2M

Used” is selected.10BASE-T Used : When the 10BASE-T signal is required,

the “10BASE-T Used” is selected.Note: When main 10BASE-T is mounted

as option, CH1 to CH4 should beselected.

--- Provisioning Data --- 1. Display Current Data 2. Set Provisioning DataEnter Selection : 2

--- Set Provisioning Data --- 1. Main Channel Usage 2. BER Threshold 3. Sub Interface 4. SC Assignment 5. MTPC TXPWR 6. ATPC Range 8. RX Threshold 9. Additional ATT10. ODU ALM Mode13. TXSW Priority14. RXSW Priority15. Channel Usage Error16. BER AISEnter Selection :

--- Main Channel Usage Setting --- 0. Not Used 1. 2M Used 2. 10BASE-T UsedCurrent Setting : 1Enter Selection ([RET] = No Change) :

Page 212: Pasolink Plus

INITIAL LINE UP ROI-S04053

3-16

Chart 3-5 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

5 After setting, press the “ESC” key to go back to menu shownin step 3,

6 Press the “2” key for setting the BER Threshold and pressthe “Enter” key,

BER Threshold sets the threshold level of BER. There are foursettable threshold values; 1×10-3, 1×10-4, 1×10-5 and 1×10-6.

Note: In the 1E-6 (1 × 10-6), release of an alarm takes a fewminutes.

7 Press the “ESC” key to go back to the menu shown in step 3,

8 Press the “3” key for setting the Sub Interface and press the“Enter” key,

Sub interface sets when using an optional interface card(LAN DSC/WS).WS : When wayside (WS) is used as Option (Applies only to

2 MB × 16 system).10BASE-T DSC/WS: When the LAN DSC/WS is used as

Option.Note: WS and 10BASE-T WS cannot be used at a time.

When the 10BASE-T DSC is selected, any one ofDSC2 through DSC4 in the SC Assignment should beset.

9 Press the “ESC” key to go back to the menu shown in step 3,

--- BER Threshold --- 1. 1E-3 2. 1E-4 3. 1E-5 4. 1E-6 (Deactivation time is mare than a few minutes)Current Setting : 2Enter Selection ([RET] = No Change) :

--- Sub Interface--- 1. WS 2. 10BASE-T DSC/WSEnter Selection :

Page 213: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INITIAL LINE UP

3-17

Chart 3-5 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

10 Press the “4” key for setting the SC Assignment and pressthe “Enter” key,

SC Assignment sets Used/Not Used for service channel andsignal assignment. As service channel, one analog voicefrequency (VF) signal, two digital V11 (9.6K) signals, twodigital V11 (64K) signals, one CLSTR alarm, and one digitalLAN DSC channel can be used.

Note: LAN DSC/WS should be set in customize mode.Easy : When easy is selected, the same setting as factory

setting is used.Customize : When customize is selected it allows to select

three out of the five available channels andassign them to any of the DSC2 through 4.Selection of Co-Directional of Contra-directional is available for V11 (64K) signal(optional).• Two V11 (9.6K/64K*) channels• One VF channel• One cluster alarm• One LAN DSC channel − option

Notes: 1. If V11 (64k) sub interface is mounted, the two V11channels can be used either 64k or 9.6k. But incase 9.6k is used, "contra directional" should beselected as clock direction.

2. * Optional.

11 Press the “ESC” key to go back to the menu shown in step 3,

--- SC Assignment --- 1. Easy 2. CustomizeCurrent Setting : 1Enter Selection ([RET] = No Change) :

Page 214: Pasolink Plus

INITIAL LINE UP ROI-S04053

3-18

Chart 3-5 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

12 Press the “5” key for setting the TX PWR and press the“Enter” key,

MTPC TX PWR sets the transmission power in MTPCoperation. If the attenuation is set to 0 dB, maximum outputpower is obtained. Setting is available in the range of −25 to0 dB. The level is not indicated in the ATPC mode.

13 Press the “ESC” key to go back to the menu shown in step 3,

14 Press the “6” key for setting the ATPC Range and press the“Enter” key,

ATPC Range sets the maximum or minimum transmissionpower during ATPC operation. If the ATPC Maximum PWRis set to 0 dB, the maximum output power is obtained. In theMTPC mode, this menu will not appear.

Note: Example of ATPC setting.Where ATPC MAXIMUM PWR of ATPC Range is setto 0 dB, ATPC MINIMUM PWR is set to -10 dB andRX Threshold to -60 dBm. In this case, if RX level issmaller than -60 dBm, monitor/control is performedwith the interval of 8 msec. RX level is monitored in 1dB step, and TX output is controlled in 1 dB step.However, a fixed hysteresis of 5 dB referred to the RXThreshold is implemented for ATPC operation.Example: If RX Threshold is set to -60 dBm, no outputcontrol is made unless the RX level goes below -60dBm or goes above -55 dBm, so that the receive level ismaintained within -60 to -55 dBm.

--- MTPC TX PWR ---Current (-25 to 0dB) : -25Enter Selection ([RET] = No Change) :

--- ATPC Maximum PWR ---Current (-25 to 0dB) : 0Enter Selection ([RET] = No Change) :

--- ATPC Minimum PWR ---Current (-25 to [MAX]dB) : -10Enter Selection ([RET] = No Change) :

Page 215: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INITIAL LINE UP

3-19

Chart 3-5 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

15 After setting, press the “ESC” key to go back to the menushown in step 3,

16 Press the “8” key for setting the RX Threshold and press the“Enter” key,

RX Threshold sets the threshold value of receiving level.Note: For details, refer to 2.4.4 (Automatic Transmitter

Power Control) of Chapter 2 in Description section.

17 Press the “ESC” key to go back to the menu shown in step 3,

18 Press the “9” key for setting the Additional ATT and pressthe “Enter” key,

The additional ATT is a span attenuator that is used to reducethe transmit power like in cases where the transmission lengthis short. First, the transmit output power is adjusted bysetting the MTPC TX Power. If the MTPC TX Power settingis insufficient, then set the Additional ATT. The availablesetting range is from 0 to 5 dB.

Note: This function can not be used in 38 GHz band ODU.Do not set to any values other than 0 dB.

19 Press the “ESC” key to go back to the menu shown in step 3,

-55 dBm

RX LEVEL

-60 dBm(RX THRESHOLD LEVEL)

5 dB(ATPCHYSTERESIS)

--- RX Threshold---Current (-55 to –30dBm) : -55Enter Selection ([RET] = No Change) :

--- Additional ATT ---Current (0 to 5dB) : 0Enter Selection ([RET] = No Change) :

Page 216: Pasolink Plus

INITIAL LINE UP ROI-S04053

3-20

Chart 3-5 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

20 Press the “1”, “0” key for setting the ODU ALM Mode andpress the “Enter” key,

This item defines the ODU transmit power level whencommunication between IDU and ODU is lost. This settingis not used when the equipment is set for MTPC operationand is thus, not displayed.MAX Hold : Selects this to cause the ODU to transmit at the

ATPC Maximum PWR setting.MIN Hold : Selects this to cause the ODU to transmit at the

ATPC Minimum PWR setting.Hold : Selects this to cause the ODU to maintain the transmit

power at the time of failure.

21 Press the “ESC” key to go back to the menu shown in step 3,

22 Press the “1”, “3” key for setting the TXSW Priority andpress the “Enter” key,

TX SW Priority sets the priority of switchover for TX switch.Non-priority: There is no priority.Priority No.1: Priority is given to No.1 channel.

23 Press the “ESC” key to go back to the menu shown in step 3,

--- ODU ALM Mode --- 1. MAX Hold 2. MIN Hold 3. HoldCurrent Setting : 3Enter Selection ([RET] = No Change) :

--- TXSW Priority --- 1. Non-priority 2. Priority No.1Current Setting : 1Enter Selection ([RET] = No Change) :

Page 217: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INITIAL LINE UP

3-21

Chart 3-5 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

24 Press the “1”, “4” key for setting the RXSW Priority andpress the “Enter” key,

RX SW Priority sets the priority of switchover for RX switch.Non-priority: There is no priority.Priority No.1: Priority is given to No.1 channel.

25 Press the “ESC” key to go back to menu shown in step 3,

26 Press the “1”, “5” key for setting the Channel Usage Errorand press the “Enter” key,

Channel Usage Error sets the whether alarm in Main ChannelUsage item is displayed, or it does not displayed.

Report: In Main Channel Usage item, when 2M bipolarsignal is inputted into the channel which has chosen“Not Used”, alarm is displayed.

Not Report: In Main Channel Usage item, even if it hasinputted 2M bipolar signal into the channelwhich has chosen “Not Used”, alarm is notdisplayed.

Note: The alarm of Channel Usage Error is displayed on theChannel Usage Error item of Alarm/Status. And theIDU ALM indicator on the front of the IDU is lighted.

27 Press the “ESC” key to go back to menu shown in step 3,

--- RXSW Priority --- 1. Non-priority 2. Priority No.1Current Setting : 1Enter Selection ([RET] = No Change) :

--- Channel Usage Error --- 1. Report 2. Not ReportCurrent Setting : 1Enter Selection ([RET] = No Change) :

Page 218: Pasolink Plus

INITIAL LINE UP ROI-S04053

3-22

Chart 3-5 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

28 Press the “1”, “6” key for setting the BER AIS and press the“Enter” key,

BER AIS Control sets the whether main 2M AIS signal isoutputed or it does not carry out.

ON: When the BER ALM is occurred, Main 2M AIS signalis outputed.

Note: Setting point of BER ALM can be set by BERthreshold item in 1 × 10-3 to 1 × 10-7.

OFF: When the BER ALM is occurred, Main 2M AIS signalis not outputed.

29 After setting the Provisioning data, proceed to Chart 3-6 forthe optional relay house keeping setting, as required.Otherwise, press the “ESC” key to go back to the menushown in step 3.

--- BER AIS Control --- 1. ON 2. OFFCurrent Setting : 1Enter Selection ([RET] = No Change) :

Page 219: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INITIAL LINE UP

3-23

Chart 3-6 Relay/House Keeping Setting

This chart describes the procedure for setting the parallel alarm output andthe status of House Keeping.

The procedure in this chart is to be performed, as required.

Step Procedure

1 Press the “ESC” key twice to go back to the following menu,

2 Press the “6” key for Relay/House Keeping and press the“Enter” key,

The relay configuration setting and alarm output selection isexplained below.

• Display Current StateSelects to display House Keeping current state.

Password : ********

--- NEC PDH RADIO VER. X.XX.XX --- 0. Logout 1. Alarm / Status 2. Performance Monitor 3. Provisioning Data 4. System Configuration 5. Inventory Data 6. Relay / House Keeping 7. MaintenanceEnter Selection :

Enter Selection : 6

--- Relay / House Keeping --- 1. Display Current State 2. Relay Configuration 3. Output ControlEnter Selection :

Page 220: Pasolink Plus

INITIAL LINE UP ROI-S04053

3-24

Chart 3-6 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

3 Press the “2” key for setting the Relay Configuration andpress the “Enter” key,

• Relay ConfigurationA maximum of 11 relays can be defined to provide parallelalarm outputs. The alarms that would cause RL1 to RL3 tobe triggered are pre-assigned while the alarms that wouldcause RL4 to RL11 to be triggered can be selected for eachrelay. It is also possible to define RL8 to RL11 as HK CONToutputs instead of alarm outputs as shown in the table below.If RL8 to RL11 are not assigned as HK CONT outputs, theymay be used as alarm outputs (see Table 2-2, chapter 2 inOperation section). As shown in Table 2-2 (chapter 2 inOperation section), more than one alarm may be assigned toeach relay.

RL1 to RL11 are FORM C relays. In the normal or controloff condition, the COM and NC terminals of the relays forma closed circuit and the COM and NO terminals from an opencircuit. In the alarm or control on condition, the COM andNC terminals of the relays form an open circuit and the COMand NO terminals from a closed circuit.

--- Relay Configuration --- 1. HK-OUT 1/2/3/4 Enable 2. HK-OUT 1/2/3 Enable 3. HK-OUT 1/2 Enable 4. HK-OUT 1 Enable 5. HK-OUT DisableEnter Selection ([RET] = No Change) :

Relay RL08 RL09 RL10 RL11

1. HK-OUT 1/2/3/4 Enable HK-OUT4 HK-OUT3 HK-OUT2 HK-OUT1

2. HK-OUT 1/2/3 Enable ALM HK-OUT3 HK-OUT2 HK-OUT1

3. HK-OUT 1/2 Enable ALM ALM HK-OUT2 HK-OUT1

4. HK-OUT 1 Enable ALM ALM ALM HK-OUT1

5. HK-OUT Disable ALM ALM ALM ALM

NCCOMNO

(FORM-C)

Page 221: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INITIAL LINE UP

3-25

Chart 3-6 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

Note: The relay is rated at 0.2 A.

4 First, if the four HK control output are required, press the“1” key and press the “Enter” key,

5 Then, the desired alarm name is selected,

Mask : Indicates that no alarm is issued at Maintenance.Out : Indicates that an alarm is issued from the corresponding

relay.– : No relationHK : Indicates that the Relay is assigned for HK control.

Note: While the CPU is initialized by depressing the RESETswitch, alarm(s) is in normal condition. Afterinitialization, the alarm information is properlyprovided through relay contacts.

Then select the relay that will be associated to the alarm thatwas previously selected.

--- Relay Configuration --- 1. HK-OUT 1/2/3/4 Enable 2. HK-OUT 1/2/3 Enable 3. HK-OUT 1/2 Enable 4. HK-OUT 1 Enable 5. HK-OUT DisableEnter Selection ([RET] = No Change) :

RL01 RL02 RL03 RL04 RL05 RL06 RL07 RL08 RL09 RL10 RL11MAINT Out Mask Mask Mask Mask Mask Mask HK HK HK HKPS ALM - Out - - - - - HK HK HK HKCPU ALM - - Out - - - - HK HK HK HK

8. ODU ALM1 - - - Out - - - HK HK HK HK 9. ODU ALM2 - - - Out - - - HK HK HK HK10. IDU ALM1 - - - - Out - - HK HK HK HK11. IDU ALM2 - - - - Out - - HK HK HK HKEnter Selection([RET]=No Change):

Page 222: Pasolink Plus

INITIAL LINE UP ROI-S04053

3-26

Chart 3-6 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

Notes: 1. “Out” is appended to a relay that has already beenassigned to the alarm, selecting it unassigns the alarmto the relay.

2. If “Are You Sure? (Y/N)” is displayed, press the “Y”key. Otherwise, it is not registered.

6 If required, press the “3” key to control external equipmentconnected to the relays assigned as HK-OUT,

• Output ControlThis function can be used to remotely control externalapparatus in the station (e.g. A/C on/off).CONT Off:COM and NC terminals of relay are connected.CONT On:COM and NO terminals of relay are connected.Notes: 1. Output control item is displayed only when the

HK-OUT Enable is selected in the relayconfiguration (step 4).

2. A setup will be cleared if a power supply is turnedoff.

7 After setting the Relay/House Keeping setting, press the“ESC” key to go back to the menu.

--- Relay Configuration --- 4. RL04 (Out) 5. RL05 6. RL06 7. RL07 8. RL08 9. RL0910. RL1011. RL11Enter Selection([RET]=No Change):

--- Output Control --- 1. HK-OUT1 (CONT Off) 2. HK-OUT2 (CONT Off) 3. HK-OUT3 (CONT On) 4. HK-OUT4 (CONT Off)Enter Selection : 1

Page 223: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INITIAL LINE UP

3-27

3.4 Antenna Orientation

After the initial setting, an antenna orientation is performed between twostations according to the procedures in Chart 3-7.

Chart 3-7 Antenna Orientation

Apparatus :HP 3466A Digital Multimeter (or equivalent) with test leads or X0818AOW/RX LEV MonitorWrench

Step Procedure

1 At each station, when the TX power control is operated inATPC, set the TX Power Control item of SystemConfiguration to “MTPC” using the LCT.Note: In Antenna Alignment Mode, since ATPC control stops, it

is set to MTPC mode and TX power is fixed.

2 At each station, TX power is set to the value calculated bythe system design. TX power setting can be performed byMTPC TX PWR item of “Provisioning Data” using LCT (orTX power is set to 0 dB (value of MTPC TX PWR item) sothat TX power becomes the maximum),Note: The MTPC TX PWR is the item which sets up the quantity

of attenuation of transmitter power, and adjuststransmitter power with the quantity of this attenuation.

--- Provisioning Data --- 1. Display Current Data 2. Set Provisioning DataEnter Selection : 2

--- Set Provisioning Data --- 1. Main Channel Usage 2. BER Threshold 3. Sub Interface 4. SC Assignment 5. MTPC TXPWR 6. ATPC Range 8. RX Threshold 9. Additional ATT10. ODU ALM Mode13. TXSW Priority14. RXSW Priority15. Channel Usage Error16. BER AISEnter Selection :

Page 224: Pasolink Plus

INITIAL LINE UP ROI-S04053

3-28

Chart 3-7 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

3 At each station, press the “9” key twice for setting theAntenna Alignment mode of “Maintenance” and press the“Enter” key,

Note: The “Antenna Alignment Mode” is used for extending thedynamic range of the RX LEVEL MONITOR (ODU). Inthis mode, since control of TX power stops, the normaloperation can not be performed.

4 At each station, remove the cap from the RX LEV MONconnector on the ODU (see Fig. 3-5),

5 At each station, set up as in Fig. 3-5 (Connect cables to RXLEV MON connector using F-type plug),

6 At each station, adjust the azimuth and elevation angle ofthe antenna alternately so that the measured voltagebecomes maximum,

Note: The relation of the RX INPUT LEVEL and RX LEVELMON is shown below.

--- Control --- 1. RF Frequency 2. ATPC Manual Control 4. TX Mute 6. CW 7. IF Loopback 8. Main 2M Loopback (Near End) 9. Main 2M Loopback (Far End)99. Antenna Alignment ModeEnter Section : 99

Page 225: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INITIAL LINE UP

3-29

Chart 3-7 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

A. USING NEW TYPE BRACKET

Azimuth Angle Adjustment

6-1 Loosen bolts (1 in Fig. 3-6),

6-2 Adjust the azimuth angle by bolt (2 in Fig. 3-6),

6-3 Secure bolts loosened in step 6-1,

Elevation Angle Adjustment

6-4 Loosen bolts (3 in Fig. 3-6),

6-5 Adjust the elevation angle by bolt (4 in Fig. 3-6),

6-6 Secure bolts loosened in step 6-4,

RX LEVEL MON vs RX INPUT LEVEL (Typical)

0

0.5

1

1.5

2

2.5

3

3.5

4

4.5

-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20

RX INPUT LEVEL [dBm]

RX L

EV

EL M

ON

 [V

]

Page 226: Pasolink Plus

INITIAL LINE UP ROI-S04053

3-30

Chart 3-7 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

B. USING OLD TYPE BRACKET

Azimuth Angle Adjustment

6-7 Loosen nuts (1 in Fig. 3-6),

6-8 Adjust the azimuth angle by adjusting the nuts (2 in Fig. 3-6),

6-9 Secure nuts loosened in step 6-8,

6-10 Secure nuts loosened in step 6-7,

Elevation Angle Adjustment

6-11 Loosen bolt(s) (3 in Fig. 3-6),

6-12 Adjust the elevation angle by adjusting the nuts (4 in Fig. 3-6),

6-13 Secure nut loosened in step 6-12,

6-14 Secure nuts loosened in step 6-11.

7 At each station, disconnect the digital multimeter or OW/RX LEV Monitor from the RX LEV MON connector,

8 At each station, reconnect the cap removed in step 4,

9 At each station, restore the “Antenna Alignment Mode” to“off” position using the LCT,

10 At each station, when the TX power control is operated inATPC, restore the TX Power Control item of SystemConfiguration changed in step 1 to “ATPC” using the LCT,

11 At each station, when the TX power control is operated inMTPC, restore MTPC TX PWR item of “ProvisioningData” changed in step 2 to original setting position using theLCT.

Page 227: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INITIAL LINE UP

3-31

Fig. 3-5 Antenna Orientation Test Setup

RX LEV MON

1 2 3 450

V

OW

OW/RX LEV MONITOR

RX LEV/OW IN

DIGITAL MULTIMETER

RX LEV MON

OR

6/7/8 GHz BAND ODU

11-38 GHz BAND ODU

Page 228: Pasolink Plus

INITIAL LINE UP ROI-S04053

3-32

Fig. 3-6 Location of Adjusting Nuts

1. Loosen for adjusting azimuth

2. Adjust azimuth

3. Loosen (1/4 TURN) bolts for adjusting elevation

1. Loosen for adjusting azimuth

2. Adjust azimuth

0.3 φ m Antenna

0.6 φ m Antenna

3. Loosen bolts for adjusting elevation

4. Adjust elevation

B. OLD TYPE BRACKET

4. Adjust elevation

2. Adjust azimuth

1. Loosen (1/2 turn) bolts for adjusting azimuth (top and bottom)

3. Loosen (1/2 turn) bolts for adjusting elevation

4. Adjust elevation

A. NEW TYPE BRACKET

Page 229: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INITIAL LINE UP

3-33

3.5 Lineup Test

Procedure for line up test between two stations are listed in Table 3-2.

Note: Chart 3-9 is Manual Switchover Operation procedures.

Chart 3-8 BER Measurement

BER measurement of both No.1 and No.2 channels are performedbetween terminal stations.

Apparatus :

Digital Multimeter (or equivalent) with test leads

Screwdriver

PDH/SDH Analyzer

Headset

Step Procedure

1 At the transmitting end, disconnect the D-sub connectorfrom the CH1-CH8 IN/OUT (or CH9-CH16 IN/OUT) (seeFig. 3-7),

2 At the receiving end, disconnect the D-sub connector fromthe CH1-CH8 IN/OUT (or CH9-CH16 IN/OUT) (see Fig. 3-7),

3 At both transmitting and receiving ends, set the function ofPDH/SDH Analyzer as follows:• Bit rate : 2.048 Mbps• Code format : HDB-3 Code• Level : 2.37 Vo-p• Impedance : 120 ohms, balanced or 75 ohms, unbalanced

Table 3-2 Lineup Test Items

Item Remarks

1 BER Measurement Chart 3-8

2 Meter Reading Chart 3-10

3 Orderwire Test Chart 3-11

Page 230: Pasolink Plus

INITIAL LINE UP ROI-S04053

3-34

Chart 3-8 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

4 At both transmitting and receiving ends, set up as shown inFig. 3-7,

5 Set the TX SW on the No.1 ODU to ON condition attransmitting end (for switching method, refer to Chart 3-9),

6 At receiving end, set the RX SW on the CTRL to No.1channel (for switching method, refer to Chart 3-9),

7 Measure the BER for each channel and confirm that theBER satisfies the requirement below,Requirement: 1 × 10–12 or less

8 Repeat steps 5 and 7 for No.2 channel,

Page 231: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INITIAL LINE UP

3-35

Notes:1. Pin assignment of D-sub connector is referred to Table 2-4 inchapter 2.

2. A conversion adapter is required when using equipment by the75 ohms interface. Please ask NEC Corporation.

Fig. 3-7 BER Measurement Setup

CH1-CH8 IN/OUT

TRANSMITTING END

IDU

CH9-CH16 IN/OUT

RECEIVING END

CH9-CH16 IN/OUT

IDU

PDH/SDHANALYZER

ALM/AUX CALLRESET

IDU

STATUS

+

R SWEOW

PASOLINK

LAN CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

NE1 NE2 V11PNMS

LAN

ALM

TX

MAINT

SEL VFUSE (7.5A)

PWRIF IN/OUT

PWR +−

WARNING-43V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWERBEFORE DISCONNECTING

I/F CABLE

!

SEL VFUSE (7.5A)

PWRIF IN/OUT

PWR +−WARNING-43V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWERBEFORE DISCONNECTING

I/F CABLE

!

ODURX

G8538 MD UNIT

G8540 SW UNIT

G8538 MD UNIT

1

2

PNMT LCT EOW1 EOW2

CH1-CH8 IN/OUT

SC IN/OUT

CH9-CH16 WS IN/OUT

ALM

LAN DSC/WS

ALM/AUX CALLRESET

IDU

STATUS

+

R SWEOW

PASOLINK

LAN CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

NE1 NE2 V11PNMS

LAN

ALM

TX

MAINT

SEL VFUSE (7.5A)

PWRIF IN/OUT

PWR +−

WARNING-43V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWERBEFORE DISCONNECTING

I/F CABLE

!

SEL VFUSE (7.5A)

PWRIF IN/OUT

PWR +−WARNING-43V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWERBEFORE DISCONNECTING

I/F CABLE

!

ODURX

G8538 MD UNIT

G8540 SW UNIT

G8538 MD UNIT

1

2

PNMT LCT EOW1 EOW2

CH1-CH8 IN/OUT

SC IN/OUT

CH9-CH16 WS IN/OUT

ALM

LAN DSC/WS

CH1-CH8 IN/OUT

PDH/SDHANALYZER

Page 232: Pasolink Plus

INITIAL LINE UP ROI-S04053

3-36

Chart 3-9 Manual Switchover Operation

Step Procedure

1 Referring to Fig. 3-4, connect the RS-232C cable betweenthe LCT and the IDU,

2 Open the Terminal software (eg; Hyper Terminal),

3 Enter Login name “Admin” and press the “Enter” key,

4 Enter password “12345678” and press the “Enter” key,

5 Press the “7” key and press the “Enter” key,

6 Press the “1” key and press the “Enter” key,

Note: Control items can only be performed when the equipmentMAINT mode is “ON”.

Login : AdminPassword : ********

--- NEC PDH RADIO VER. X.XX.XX --- 0. Logout 1. Alarm / Status 2. Performance Monitor 3. Provisioning Data 4. System Configuration 5. Inventory Data 6. Relay / House Keeping 7. MaintenanceEnter Selection :

7. MaintenanceEnter Selection : 7

--- Maintenance --- 1. MAINT Mode (OFF) 2. Control 3. Reset CPU 4. Set Calendar 5. Password Setting 6. Program DownloadEnter Selection :

Page 233: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INITIAL LINE UP

3-37

Chart 3-9 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

7 Press the “2” key and press the “Enter” key,

Note: Setting items displayed on the LCT depend on setting conditionof “System Configuration”.

8 Press the desired item No. and press the “Enter” key. Setthe TX SW and RX SW as desired to “No.1”, “No.2” or“Auto”,

9 After testing, set the TX SW and RX SW to “Auto”,

10 Set the maintenance mode to “OFF” condition,

11 Press the “ESC” key to return to the main menu,

12 Press the “0” key and press the “Enter” key.

Enter Selection : 2

--- Control --- 1. RF Frequency 2. ATPC Manual Control 3. TXSW Manual Control 4. TX Mute 5. RXSW Manual Control 6. CW 7. IF Loopback 8. Main 2M Loopback (Near End) 9. Main 2M Loopback (Far End)99. Antenna Alignment ModeEnter Selection :

Page 234: Pasolink Plus

INITIAL LINE UP ROI-S04053

3-38

Chart 3-10 Meter Reading

Step Procedure

1 Referring to Fig. 3-4, connect the RS-232C cable betweenthe LCT and the IDU,

2 Open the Terminal software (eg; Hyper Terminal),

3 Enter Login name “Admin” and press the “Enter” key,

4 Enter password “12345678” and press the “Enter” key,

5 Press the “2” key for Performance Monitor and press the“Enter” key,

6 Press the “1” key for Display Metering/BER and press the“Enter” key,

Login : AdminPassword : ********

--- NEC PDH RADIO VER. X.XX.XX --- 0. Logout 1. Alarm / Status 2. Performance Monitor 3. Provisioning Data 4. System Configuration 5. Inventory Data 6. Relay / House Keeping 7. MaintenanceEnter Selection :

Enter Selection : 2

--- Performance Monitor --- 1. Display Metering / BER 2. Display Performance Monitor 3. Display Threshold Data 4. Set Threshold Data

Page 235: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INITIAL LINE UP

3-39

Chart 3-10 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

7 Then, the value of TX POWER, RX LEVEL and ODU PSMON are displayed. Confirm that the LCT indication is asdescribed in Table 3-3,

Notes: 1. The left side results are for No.1 channel and rightside for No.2 channel.

2. * BER (radio BER) is calculated every one minute.“Calculating” is displayed till the value is fixed.

3. When the data is invalid, *.E-** is displayed.4. TX POWER/RX LEVEL is indicated in 1 dB step.

Enter Selection : 1

--- Display Metering / BER --- TX POWER +10dBm ***dBm RX LEVEL -60dBm -55dBm ODU PS MON -43V -43V BER 0.0E-10 *

Table 3-3 Meter Reading

Check Item Normal Indication Allowable Range

TX POWER

6/7/8 GHz +26 to −4 dBm

Normal Indication ±3 dB

11 GHz +21.5 to −8.5 dBm13 GHz +18.5 to −11.5 dBm15 GHz +17.5 to −12.5 dBm18/23 GHz +20 to −10 dBm26 GHz +18 to −12 dBm38 GHz +14.5 to −15.5 dBm

Page 236: Pasolink Plus

INITIAL LINE UP ROI-S04053

3-40

Chart 3-10 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

Notes:1. If an abnormal indication appears, proceed with 5.1(Fault Location) of chapter 5 in Maintenance section.

2. *Varies with receiving RF signal level.3. **Varies with cable length between the IDU and ODU.4. ***This value is required to keep a system quality of

10-3.5. TX POWER and RX LEVEL indication precision is

±3 dB.6. Record display indication on the LCT.

8 After testing, press the “ESC” key to return to previousmenu,

9 Press the “0” key to Logout and press the “Enter” key.

Table 3-3 Meter Reading (Cont’d)

Check Item Normal Indication Allowable Range

RX LEVEL –30 dBm*

6/7/8 GHz–15 to –84.0 dBm*** (2 MB × 8)–15 to –81.0 dBm*** (2 MB × 16)

11 GHz–15 to –84.0 dBm*** (2 MB × 8)–15 to –81.0 dBm*** (2 MB × 16)

13 GHz–15 to –83.5 dBm*** (2 MB × 8)–15 to –80.5 dBm*** (2 MB × 16)

15/18/23 GHz–15 to –84.0 dBm*** (2 MB × 8)–15 to –81.0 dBm*** (2 MB × 16)

26 GHz–15 to –83.0 dBm*** (2 MB × 8)–15 to –80.0 dBm*** (2 MB × 16)

38 GHz–15 to –82.0 dBm*** (2 MB × 8)–15 to –79.0 dBm*** (2 MB × 16)

ODU PS MON –40 V** –32 to –46 V DC

Page 237: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04053 INITIAL LINE UP

3-41

Chart 3-11 Oderwire Test

Step Procedure

1 Connect the headset(s) to the EOW jack on the IDU and/orto the HEADSET jack on the OW/RX LEV Monitor (seeFigs. 3-8 and 3-9),

2 Connect the OW/RX LEV Monitor to the RX LEV MONconnector on the ODU (see Fig. 3-9),

3 Press the CALL button on the IDU,

Requirement: At the opposite station, the buzzer on the IDUwill be activated,

4 Check that the orderwire communication between thestations is possible by using headsets (IDU-IDU),

5 Set the OW switch on the OW/RX LEV Monitor to ON(OW indicator on the OW/RX LEV Monitor is turned on),

6 Check that the orderwire communication between the IDUand ODU can be connected by using headsets,

7 Set the OW switch on the OW/RX LEV Monitor to OFF(OW indicator on the OW/RX LEV Monitor is turned off),

Note: The battery becomes weak if the OW switch is kept ON.

8 Disconnect the headset(s) from the EOW jack on the IDU,and/or from the HEADSET jack on the OW/RX LEVMonitor,

9 Disconnect the OW/RX LEV Monitor from the RX LEVMON connector on the ODU.

Page 238: Pasolink Plus

INITIAL LINE UP ROI-S04053

3-4242 pages

Fig. 3-8 Lineup Test Setup for IDU

Fig. 3-9 OW Test Setup

(FRONT VIEW)IDU

EOW CALL

ALM/AUX CALLRESET

IDU

STATUS

+

R SWEOW

PASOLINK

LAN CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

NE1 NE2 V11PNMS

LAN

ALM

TX

MAINT

SEL VFUSE (7.5A)

PWRIF IN/OUT

PWR +−

WARNING-43V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWERBEFORE DISCONNECTING

I/F CABLE

!

SEL VFUSE (7.5A)

PWRIF IN/OUT

PWR +−WARNING-43V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWERBEFORE DISCONNECTING

I/F CABLE

!

ODURX

G8538 MD UNIT

G8540 SW UNIT

G8538 MD UNIT

1

2

PNMT LCT EOW1 EOW2

CH1-CH8 IN/OUT

SC IN/OUT

CH9-CH16 WS IN/OUT

ALM

LAN DSC/WS

RX LEV MON

1 2 3 450

V

OW

OW/RX LEV MONITOR

RX LEV/OW IN

DIGITAL MULTIMETER

RX LEV MON

OR

6/7/8 GHz BAND ODU

11-38 GHz BAND ODU

HEAD SET

Page 239: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04054-052E CONTENTS020326

CL-1

6-38 GHz 17/34 MBPDH DIGITAL MICROWAVE RADIO SYSTEM

PASOLINK +

(PDH/1+1 SYSTEM)

MAINTENANCE

CONTENTS

TITLE PAGE1. GENERAL ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1-1

2. PRECAUTIONS ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-1

3. TEST SETS AND ACCESSORIES ••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-1

4. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE•••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 4-1

5. CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-15.1 Fault Location •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-15.2 Replacement ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-175.2.1 IDU Replacement ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-175.2.2 ODU Replacement•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-175.3 Alignment••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-30

APPENDIX CHANGES OF PASSWORD••••••••••••••••••••• A-11. General ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• A-12. Procedure•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• A-1

Page 240: Pasolink Plus

CONTENTS ROI-S04054

CL-22 pages

(This page is intentionally left blank.)

Page 241: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04054 GENERAL

1-1

1. GENERAL

This section provides instructions for the maintenance of the 6/7/8/11/13/15/18/23/26/38 GHz 17/34 MB digital microwave radio system.

This section provides precautions and instructions on preventivemaintenance and corrective maintenance.

The firmware version described in this manual is 1.0.**.

Page 242: Pasolink Plus

GENERAL ROI-S04054

1-22 pages

(This page is intentionally left blank.)

Page 243: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04054 PRECAUTIONS

2-1

2. PRECAUTIONS

The following precautions must be carefully observed duringmaintenance.

(a) The maintenance personnel should report arrival at and departurefrom a station to the relevant station. The following are dangersand warnings to the maintenance personnel.

Warning: 1. The –43 V DC power is superimposed on the centerconductor of the coaxial cable between the IDU and theODU. Connecting a test equipment directly to thisterminal may damage it, and touching the coaxial cablecore may cause electrical shock.

2. Persons performing servicing must take necessary stepsto avoid electro-static discharge which may damage themodules on the IDU or cause error. Wear a conductivewrist strap connected to the grounded (G) jack on thefront of the equipment shelf. This will minimize staticbuild-up during servicing (see Fig. 2-1).

3. Do not disconnect IF cable between the IDU and theODU in operating condition, to avoid damaging the IDUand ODU. Do not remove/connect the IF cable with IDUpower ON. Turn IDU power OFF before reconnectingthe IF cable.

4. After turning ON the equipment, wait at least 1 minutebefore turning it OFF again. Repeatedly turning thepower ON and OFF with in a short interval may causethe IDU to fail.

5. Contact NEC before program download on the LCT isperformed. Equipment may not function correctly withimproper operation.

Caution: Be careful that top surface of the IDU is hot.

(b) During maintenance, the IDU should be set to maintenancecondition by the local craft terminal (LCT) (see Chart 2-1).

(c) To avoid service interruption, perform manual protectionswitching as shown in Chart 2-2.Note: When protection switching has been automatically

completed during a fault, keep this condition by manualprotection switching operation.

(d) When the operation of “Control” in maintenance item on LCT iscarried out, set MAINT Mode to “ON” condition first.

Page 244: Pasolink Plus

PRECAUTIONS ROI-S04054

2-2

(e) Information on the maintenance and the control such as TX SW,RX SW, Mute, CW, LB, etc. is released if the power is turned offor the RESET switch is pressed.

(f) Service will be interrupted instantly by pressing the RESETswitch.

(g) When the control such as TX MUTE, CW, LB, etc. is performed,set TX SW and RX SW to the same channel certainly. If it carriesout in AUTO condition, it may not operate normally.

(h) Instantaneous circuit interruption may occur when performing theTX SW manual switching operation.

(i) Before removing or installing the IDU/ODU, turn off the powerswitch on the IDU.

(j) For procedures to change the password, refer to the Appendix inthis section.

(k) After equipment start-up, allow the equipment to warm up at least30 minutes.

(l) After completing maintenance, restore all connections and manualswitch(es) to normal and confirm that all red alarm LEDs are unlit.

Fig. 2-1 Location of G Terminal

G FRONT VIEWIDU

ALM/AUX CALLRESET

IDU

STATUS

+

R SWEOW

PASOLINK

LAN CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

NE1 NE2 V11PNMS

LAN

ALM

TX

MAINT

SEL VFUSE (7.5A)

PWRIF IN/OUT

PWR +−

WARNING-43V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWERBEFORE DISCONNECTING

I/F CABLE

!

SEL VFUSE (7.5A)

PWRIF IN/OUT

PWR +−WARNING-43V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWERBEFORE DISCONNECTING

I/F CABLE

!

ODURX

G8538 MD UNIT

G8540 SW UNIT

G8538 MD UNIT

1

2

PNMT LCT EOW1 EOW2

CH1-CH8 IN/OUT

SC IN/OUT

CH9-CH16 WS IN/OUT

ALM

LAN DSC/WS

Page 245: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04054 PRECAUTIONS

2-3

Chart 2-1 Maintenance Mode Setting

Step Procedure

1 Connect the RS-232C cable between the LCT and the IDU,

Fig. 2-2 LCT Setup

2 Open the Terminal software (eg; Hyper Terminal),

LCT

RS-232C CABLE

ALM/AUX CALLRESET

IDU

STATUS

+

R SWEOW

PASOLINK

LAN CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

NE1 NE2 V11PNMS

LAN

ALM

TX

MAINT

SEL VFUSE (7.5A)

PWRIF IN/OUT

PWR +−

WARNING-43V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWERBEFORE DISCONNECTING

I/F CABLE

!

SEL VFUSE (7.5A)

PWRIF IN/OUT

PWR +−WARNING-43V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWERBEFORE DISCONNECTING

I/F CABLE

!

ODURX

G8538 MD UNIT

G8540 SW UNIT

G8538 MD UNIT

1

2

PNMT LCT EOW1 EOW2

CH1-CH8 IN/OUT

SC IN/OUT

CH9-CH16 WS IN/OUT

ALM

LAN DSC/WS

Page 246: Pasolink Plus

PRECAUTIONS ROI-S04054

2-4

Chart 2-1 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

3 Enter Login name “Admin” and the “Enter” key,

4 Enter the specified password and press the “Enter” key,

Maintenance Mode Setting

5 Press the “7” key and press the “Enter” key,

6 Press the “1” key and press the “Enter” key,

Login : AdminPassword : ********

--- NEC PDH RADIO VER. X.XX.XX --- 0. Logout 1. Alarm / Status 2. Performance Monitor 3. Provisioning Data 4. System Configuration 5. Inventory Data 6. Relay / House Keeping 7. MaintenanceEnter Selection :

Enter Selection : 7

--- Maintenance --- 1. MAINT Mode (OFF) 2. Control 3. Reset CPU 4. Set Calendar 5. Password Setting 6. Program DownloadEnter Selection : 1

--- MAINT Mode --- 1. On 2. OffEnter Selection : 1

--- Maintenance --- 1. MAINT Mode (ON) 2. Control 3. Reset CPU 4. Set Calendar 5. Password Setting 6. Program DownloadEnter Selection :

Page 247: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04054 PRECAUTIONS

2-5

Chart 2-1 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

7 Press the “1” (ON) key and press the “Enter” key,

Restoring to Normal Mode

8 Press the “7” key and press the “Enter” key,

9 Press the “1” key and press the “Enter” key,

10 Press the “2” (OFF) key and press the “Enter” key,

11 Press the “ESC” key to return to previous menu,

12 Press the “0” key to logout and press the “Enter” key.

--- NEC PDH RADIO VER. X.XX.XX --- 0. Logout 1. Alarm / Status 2. Performance Monitor 3. Provisioning Data 4. System Configuration 5. Inventory Data 6. Relay / House Keeping 7. MaintenanceEnter Selection : 7

--- Maintenance --- 1. MAINT Mode (ON) 2. Control 3. Reset CPU 4. Set Calendar 5. Password Setting 6. Program DownloadEnter Selection : 1

--- MAINT Mode --- 1. On 2. OffEnter Selection : 2

--- Maintenance --- 1. MAINT Mode (OFF) 2. Control 3. Reset CPU 4. Set Calendar 5. Password Setting 6. Program DownloadEnter Selection :

Page 248: Pasolink Plus

PRECAUTIONS ROI-S04054

2-6

Chart 2-2 Manual Switchover Operation

Step Procedure

1 Referring to Fig. 2-2 in chapter 2, connect the RS-232Ccable between the LCT and the IDU,

2 Open the Terminal software (eg; Hyper Terminal),

3 Enter Login name “Admin” and press the “Enter” key,

4 Enter specified password and press the “Enter” key,

5 Press the “7” key and press the “Enter” key,

6 Press the “1” key and press the “Enter” key,

Note: Control items can only be performed when the equipmentMAINT mode is “ON”.

Login : AdminPassword : ********

--- NEC PDH RADIO VER. X.XX.XX --- 0. Logout 1. Alarm / Status 2. Performance Monitor 3. Provisioning Data 4. System Configuration 5. Inventory Data 6. Relay / House Keeping 7. MaintenanceEnter Selection :

7. MaintenanceEnter Selection : 7

--- Maintenance --- 1. MAINT Mode (OFF) 2. Control 3. Reset CPU 4. Set Calendar 5. Password Setting 6. Program DownloadEnter Selection :

Page 249: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04054 PRECAUTIONS

2-7

Chart 2-2 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

7 Press the “2” key and press the “Enter” key,

Note: Setting items displayed on the LCT depend on setting condition of“System Configuration”.

8 Press the desired item No. and press the “Enter” key. Setthe TX SW and/or RX SW to desired “No.1”, “No.2” or“Auto” position according to display indication,

9 After testing, set the TX SW and RX SW to “Auto” position,

10 Set maintenance mode to “OFF” condition according todisplay on the LCT,

11 Press the “ESC” key to return to previous menu,

12 Press the “0” key and press the “Enter” key.

Enter Selection : 2

--- Control --- 1. RF Frequency 2. ATPC Manual Control 3. TXSW Manual Control 4. TX Mute 5. RXSW Manual Control 6. CW 7. IF Loopback 8. Main 2M Loopback (Near End) 9. Main 2M Loopback (Far End)99. Antenna Alignment ModeEnter Selection :

Page 250: Pasolink Plus

PRECAUTIONS ROI-S04054

2-88 pages

(This page is intentionally left blank.)

Page 251: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04054 TEST SETS AND ACCESSORIES

3-1

3. TEST SETS AND ACCESSORIES

The test sets and special accessories listed in Table 3-1 are required formaintenance. If recommended test sets and accessories are not available,equivalents may be used.

Notes:1. * The OW/RX LEV Monitor operates on a dry battery (6F22/9V). When the OW/RX LEV Monitor will not be used for along period, remove the battery to avoid damage frombattery leakage and corrosion.

2. **The communication/serial port settings of the personalcomputer used as local craft terminal (LCT) is listed below.

• Bits per second : 19200 bps• Data bits : 8• Parity : none• Stop bits : 1• Flow control : Hardware• Emulation : VT100 Video Terminal• Transmission : Add CR at end of line : No

(send line ends with linefeeds:No)*Local echo : No(Eco typed characters locally : No)*

• Receiving : CR : No(Append line feeds to incomingline feeds : No)*Return on the right edge : Yes(Wrap lines that exceedterminal width : yes)*Force incoming data to 7-bitASCII : No

* Windows Hyper Terminal settings.

Table 3-1 Test Sets and Accessories

No. Model Type Model Number Manufacture

1 PDH/SDH Analyzer MP1550A Anritsu

2 Digital Multimeter HP34401A HP

3 OW/RX LEV Monitor* X0818A NEC

4 Screwdriver — —

5 T Type Hexagonal Driver — —

6 Torque Wrench — —

7 Local Craft Terminal (LCT)** — —

Page 252: Pasolink Plus

TEST SETS AND ACCESSORIES ROI-S04054

3-2

These display screens are shown in Fig. 3-1.The operation check by Hyper Terminal attached toWindows is performed by Windows 95/98. When using theHyper Terminal mode of Windows 2000, the characters maynot be displayed correctly.The pin assignment is shown in Fig. 3-2. The cable lengthof RS-232C between the personal computer and IDU shallbe less than 15 m.

3. For operating the LCT properly, do not use the arrow key“→, ↑ , etc.” (as generates the ESC code) instead of theESC key.

4. Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademark ofMicrosoft Corporation in the United States and othercountries.

Page 253: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04054 TEST SETS AND ACCESSORIES

3-3

Fig. 3-1 Display Screens

Note: Please refer to the above screenshots as an example forthe Hyper Terminal Setting.

Page 254: Pasolink Plus

TEST SETS AND ACCESSORIES ROI-S04054

3-44 pages

Fig. 3-2 RS-232C Cable Pin Assignment

SIGNALNAME

PINNo.

87654321

RTSCTSDTRGNDDSRRXDTXDCD

LCT

SIGNALNAME

PINNo.

87654321

CTSRTSDTRGNDDSRTXDRXDDCD

IDU SIDE LCT CONNECTOR

MODULAR CONNECTORD-SUB CONNECTOR(9 Pins)

Page 255: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04054 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

4-1

4. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

This chapter provides the routine (annual) maintenance procedures toensure the satisfactory operation of the equipment. During preventivemaintenance, carefully observe the precautions given in chapter 2.

• Meter Reading — Chart 4-1

Chart 4-1 Meter Reading

Step Procedure

1 Connect the RS-232C cable between the LCT and IDU (seeFig. 2-2 in Chart 2-1),

2 Open the Terminal software (eg; Hyper Terminal),

3 Enter Login name “User” and press the “Enter” key on theLCT,

4 Press the “2” key for Performance Monitor and press the“Enter” key,

Login : User

--- NEC PDH RADIO VER. X.XX.XX --- 0. Logout 1. Alarm / Status 2. Performance Monitor 3. Provisioning Data 4. System Configuration 5. Inventory Data 6. Relay / House KeepingEnter Selection :

Page 256: Pasolink Plus

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ROI-S04054

4-2

Chart 4-1 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

5 Press the “1” key for Display Metering /BER and press the“Enter” key. Verify the all items listed in Table 4-1.

Notes: 1. The left side results are for No.1 channel and right side forNo.2 channel.

2. “3.0E-4” indication indicates the 3 × 10-4 bit error rate.3. * BER (radio BER) is calculated every one minute.

“Calculating” is displayed till the value is fixed.4. TX POWER/RX LEVEL is indicated in 1 dB step.

--- NEC PDH RADIO VER. X.XX.XX --- 0. Logout 1. Alarm / Status 2. Performance Monitor 3. Provisioning Data 4. System Configuration 5. Inventory Data 6. Relay / House KeepingEnter Selection : 2

--- Performance Monitor --- 1. Display Metering / BER 2. Display Performance MonitorEnter Selection : 1

--- Display Metering / BER --- TX POWER +10dBm ***dBm RX LEVEL -60dBm -56dBm ODU PS MON -43V -43V BER 0.0E-10 *

--- Performance Monitor --- 1. Display Metering / BER 2. Display Performance MonitorEnter Selection :

Page 257: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04054 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

4-3

Chart 4-1 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

Notes:1. If an abnormal indication appears, proceed to 5.1(Fault Location) in chapter 5.

2. *Varies with receiving RF signal level.3. **Varies with cable length between the IDU and ODU.4. ***This value is required to keep a system quality of

10-3.5. Record display indication on the LCT.

6 Press the “2” key for Display Performance Monitor andpress the “Enter” key, if necessary,

Table 4-1 Meter Reading

Check Item Normal Indication Allowable Range

TX POWER

6/7/8 GHz +26 to −4 dBm

Normal Indication ±3 dB

11 GHz +21.5 to −8.5 dBm13 GHz +18.5 to −11.5 dBm15 GHz +17.5 to −12.5 dBm18/23 GHz +20 to −10 dBm26 GHz +18 to −12 dBm38 GHz +14.5 to −15.5 dBm

RX LEVEL –30 dBm*

6/7/8 GHz–15 to –84.0 dBm*** (2 MB × 8)–15 to –81.0 dBm*** (2 MB × 16)

11 GHz–15 to –84.0 dBm*** (2 MB × 8)–15 to –81.0 dBm*** (2 MB × 16)

13 GHz–15 to –83.5 dBm*** (2 MB × 8)–15 to –80.5 dBm*** (2 MB × 16)

15/18/23 GHz–15 to –84.0 dBm*** (2 MB × 8)–15 to –81.0 dBm*** (2 MB × 16)

26 GHz–15 to –83.0 dBm*** (2 MB × 8)–15 to –80.0 dBm*** (2 MB × 16)

38 GHz–15 to –82.0 dBm*** (2 MB × 8)–15 to –79.0 dBm*** (2 MB × 16)

ODU PS MON –40 V** –32 to –46 V DC

Page 258: Pasolink Plus

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ROI-S04054

4-4

Chart 4-1 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

7 Press the “1” key for 15min Register/CH and press the“Enter” key,

8 Press the desired channel No. and press the “Enter” key,

Note: In the 2 MB × 8 system, “CH select (1-8)” is displayed.In the 2 MB × 16 system, “CH select (1-16)” is displayed.

Notes: 1. Indicates the performance of the input signal and theperformance of the Radio every 15 min. or every day. The 15min performance is indicated for up to 24 hours and thedaily performance is indicated for up to 7 days.

--- Performance Monitor --- 1. Display Metering / BER 2. Display Performance MonitorEnter Selection : 2

--- Display Performance Monitor --- 1. 15min Register / CH 2. 15min Register / TOTAL 3. 1day Register / CH 4. 1day Register / TOTALEnter Selection : 1

CH Select (1-16) : 815min Register/CH-8 Time Stamp | Status | OFS | BBE | ES | SES | UAS------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2001/01/01 00:15 | Invalid | + 12 | + 34567 | + 890 | + 12 | 34 2001/01/01 00:30 | Valid | 5 | + 6789 | 12 | 3 | 4

2001/01/01 05:45 | Valid | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 2001/01/01 06:00 | Valid | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0

Next Data ? (Y/N) : y

--- Display Performance Monitor --- 1. 15min Register / CH 2. 15min Register / TOTAL 3. 1day Register / CH 4. 1day Register / TOTALEnter Selection :

Page 259: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04054 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

4-5

Chart 4-1 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

Items displayed are as follows:• OFS : Out of frame second• BBE : Background block error• ES : Errored second• SES : Severely errors second• UAS : Unavailable second

Explanation of data part.Time Stamp : Indicates the time for creating data (Year/

Month/Day Hour: Minute)Status : Status of relevant register

Current : Indicates the data currently beingmeasured.

Valid : Indicates valid data.Invalid : Indicates invalid data.MAINT: Indicates the data created during MAINT.

DATA : The “+” mark preceding the number indicates thatthe preset TCN value has been exceeded.

2. Press the “Y” or “y” key to display the next data.Otherwise, press the “N” or “n” key.

9 Check the following items in same manner,2. 15min Register/TOTAL3. 1day Register/CH4. 1day Register/TOTAL

Note: When the “15min Register/TOTAL” or “1day Register/TOTAL” is selected, CH select (1-*) is not displayed.

10 Press the “ESC” key to return to previous menu,

11 Press the “0” key to Logout and press the “Enter” key.

Page 260: Pasolink Plus

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ROI-S04054

4-66 pages

(This page is intentionally left blank.)

Page 261: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04054 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5-1

5. CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

Corrective maintenance done in the field is described in this chapter.Corrective maintenance in the field covers fault isolation, module/unitreplacement and alignment. The fault location procedures describes howto isolate unit-level faults.

Faults can be classified into those that cause deterioration of thetransmission quality and those that interrupt the service due to amalfunction of the equipment. This chapter explains the troubleshootingprocedures for equipment faults and the corresponding remedial methods.The purpose of troubleshooting malfunctioning equipment is to restart theservice by locating the faulty part and replacing it with a spare.

The faults that cause deterioration in the transmission quality are primarilyoriginated by changes occurred in the state of propagation. Therefore, if adecline in the transmission quality or similar fault takes place frequently,the link design will have to be reviewed.

During the corrective maintenance, carefully observe the precautionsgiven in chapter 2, until the alignment is completed.

5.1 Fault Location

The following 3 methods are available for checking the details of a fault:

• Checking the ALM LED Indications and LCT Indication

• Meter Readings

• Loopback.

(a) Checking the ALM LED Indications and LCT IndicationA faulty part can be located by checking the ALM LED indicationsand LCT indications. For the explanation of the ALM LEDindication and LCT indication, refer to 2.4.1 (Alarm Indication andReporting) of chapter 2 in Description section. Also refer to Chart5-1 for operations of the LCT.

Page 262: Pasolink Plus

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ROI-S04054

5-2

(b) Meter ReadingsBased on the meter readings during periodical inspection describedin chapter 4, a faulty part can be located by checking if the readingvalues exceed the permissible ranges. Table 5-1 shows thecorrespondence between the items for which abnormal readingsare detected and the faulty parts. In the case of an abnormal BERmeasurement result, try to locate the faulty part by (c) Loopback.

(c) LoopbackWhen there is an interruption of signals, use the PDH/SDHAnalyzer and isolate the faulty part by checking the passage of the2 MB signal by loopback. Locate the fault by using the followingdiagrams.

• Fig. 5-1 – Loopback Diagram for Fault IsolationShows the section from where the signal is turned back.

• Chart 5-2 – Loopback BER Measurement

• Fig. 5-2 – BER Measurement Setup

• Chart 5-3 – Loopback Control Setting

When maintenance such as isolating a faulty portion at the occurrence offailure and revising the software are carried out, the “Control” item inMaintenance is used.

Note: Setting items displayed on the LCT depend on setting condition of“System Configuration”.

Details of “Control” item is described as follows:

Enter Selection : 2

--- Control --- 1. RF Frequency 2. ATPC Manual Control 3. TXSW Manual Control 4. TX Mute 5. RXSW Manual Control 6. CW 7. IF Loopback 8. Main 2M Loopback (Near End) 9. Main 2M Loopback (Far End)99. Antenna Alignment ModeEnter Selection :

Page 263: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04054 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5-3

ControlControl items can be selected only under maintenance mode. As this“Control” is likely to cause disconnection of signal, take care duringoperation.

• RF FrequencySets the transmitting and receiving RF frequencies.

• ATPC manual controlUsed when changing of the transmitting power is required duringATPC operation.

• TXSW manual controlControls manual switchover of the TX SW at the transmitting side inthe 1+1 Hot standby (HS) system.

• TX muteTurns off/disables the transmitter output.

• RXSW manual controlControls manual switchover of the RX SW in the 1+1 system. Theswitchover is carried out without traffic interruption. Adjustment ofthe delay time of No.1 and No.2 is automatically set.

• CWUsed for outputting a clean carrier wave (CW). Used to confirm thetransmitting output power and frequency stability.

• IF loopbackUsed for localizing equipment failure to IDU or ODU. The input2.048 MB signal from MUX is looped back at IF stage. If noabnormality is found in the signal after IF loopback, it is assumed thatthe ODU has a problem.

• Main 2M loopback (NEAR END)Used for localizing equipment failure to MUX equipment or radioequipment. The input 2.048 MB signal from MUX is looped backand then output with 2.048 MB signal. If no abnormality is found inthe signal with NEAR END loopback, it is assumed that the radioequipment (IDU or ODU) has a problem.

• Main 2M loopback (FAR END)Used for localizing equipment failure to MUX equipment or radioequipment. Signal is looped back at the IDU of the opposite station.If no abnormality is found in the signal through FAR END loopback,it is assumed that the local radio equipment (IDU or ODU) has noproblem.

Page 264: Pasolink Plus

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ROI-S04054

5-4

• Antenna Alignment ModeThe Antenna Alignment Mode is the mode used for AntennaOrientation. This mode is used for extending the dynamic range ofthe RX LEVEL MONITOR. The output of RX LEV MON in ODUcan be enlarged and the meter indication of the OW/RX LEVMonitor can be enlarged. In this mode, since control of TX powerstops, the normal operation can not be performed.

Note: The relation of the RX INPUT LEVEL and RX LEVEL MONis shown below.

RX LEVEL MON vs RX INPUT LEVEL (Typical)

0

0.5

1

1.5

2

2.5

3

3.5

4

4.5

-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20

RX INPUT LEVEL [dBm]

RX L

EV

EL M

ON

 [V

]

Page 265: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04054 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5-5

Note: O indicates abnormal condition.

Chart 5-1 Alarm and Status Monitoring

Step Procedure

1 Connect the RS-232C cable between the LCT and IDU (seeFig. 2-2 in Chart 2-1),

2 Open the Terminal software (eg; Hyper Terminal),

3 Enter Login name “User” and press the “Enter” key on theLCT,

4 Press the “1” key for Alarm/Status and press the “Enter”key,

Table 5-1 Fault Isolation by Meter Reading

ConditionMeter Reading Fault

IsolationTX Power RX Level ODU PS MON

1 ODU

2 Path propagation or ODU

3DC-DC CONV module on MD UNIT of IDU or IF cable

Login : User

--- NEC PDH RADIO VER. X.XX.XX --- 0. Logout 1. Alarm / Status 2. Performance Monitor 3. Provisioning Data 4. System Configuration 5. Inventory Data 6. Relay / House KeepingEnter Selection :

Page 266: Pasolink Plus

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ROI-S04054

5-6

Chart 5-1 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

Notes: 1. The left side status indication is for No. 1 channel and rightside for No.2 channel.

2. *1 When an “Alarm” indication is displayed, the ODU hasa failure.

Enter Selection : 1

--- ODU --- TX POWER Normal Normal TX INPUT Normal Normal RX LEVEL Normal Normal APC Normal Normal CABLE Alarm NormalNext Data ? (Y/N) : y

--- IDU --- MOD Alarm Normal DEM Alarm Normal HIGH BER Normal Normal LOF Normal Normal MD CPU Alarm Normal BER ALM Normal Alarm MAIN INTFC 2M LOS (CH1-8) ∗ ∗ – – ∗ – – – (CH9-16) ∗ – – – – – – – CHANNEL USAGE ERROR (CH1-8) – – – – ∗ – – ∗

(CH9-16) – – ∗ – – ∗ – – MAIN 2M AIS RCVD (CH1-8) ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ – – – –

(CH9-16) ∗ – – – – – – – INTFC TX ALM Normal INTFC RX ALM Alarm SUB INTFC 2M LOS Normal SUB INTFC 2M AIS RCVD RCVDNext Data ? (Y/N) : y

--- MODULE --- MAIN INTFC Alarml MODEM Normal Normal SUB INTFC Normal POWER SUPPLY Normal Normal

--- NEC PDH RADIO VER. X.XX.XX --- 0. Logout 1. Alarm / Status 2. Performance Monitor 3. Provisioning Data 4. System Configuration 5. Inventory Data 6. Relay / House KeepingEnter Selection :

*1

*2

*2

*3

*4

*5

Page 267: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04054 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5-7

Chart 5-1 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

3. *2 When an “Alarm” indication is displayed, the MD UNITon IDU is failure.

4. *3 When an “Alarm” indication is displayed, SW UNIT isfailure.

5. *4 In the 2 MB × 8 system, (CH1-8) is indicated only.6. *4 and *5 In the 2 MB × 16 system, (CH1-8) and (CH9-16)

are indicated7. *5 When an “*” indication is displayed, external equipment

has a failure (“−” indication is normal condition).8. Alarm and status indication items should be displayed

depending on system requirement.

The alarm and status of each module and ODU are displayed.Each items is explained below.

TX POWER: Indicates the status of the transmitter in the ODU.When the normal transmission level can not beoutput due to failure in the transmitter, this alarmis issued.

TX INPUT: Indicates the status of the input modulated signalfrom IDU. If the input signal from the IDU is lost,this alarm is issued.

RX LEVEL: Indicates the status of the receiver in the ODU. Ifthe receiving level exceeds the RX signal levelrequirements, this alarm is issued.

APC: Indicates the status of the synthesizer in the ODU. If anyabnormality occurs in the synthesizer, this alarm is issued.

CABLE: Indicates the status of communication between IDUand ODU. If a communication abnormality is causedbetween ODU and the IDU, this alarm is issued.

MOD: Indicates the status of the modulator. If a failureoccurred in the modulator and as a result of a transmitterside LSI failure, this alarm is issued.

DEM: Indicates the status of the demodulator. If a IF input lossoccurred in the demodulator, this alarm is issued.

Page 268: Pasolink Plus

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ROI-S04054

5-8

Chart 5-1 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

HIGH BER: Indicates the status of quality deterioration statusof the highway between radio sections. If thesignal is deteriorates below the threshold value (1× 10-3 fixed), this alarm is issued.

LOF: Indicates the radio frame synchronization status.

MD CPU: Indicates the status of communication between theIDU modules. If any abnormality in the response ofa module in the IDU has occurred, this alarm isissued.

BER ALM Indicates bit error rate (BER) of the data signal. Ifthe signal is deteriorated below the preset thresholdvalue, this alarm is issued. The settable thresholdvalues are: 1×10-3, 1×10-4, 1×10-5 and 1×10-6.

MAIN INTFC 2M LOS: Indicates the input status of the 2.048MB signal for Main INTFC. If theinput is disconnected, this alarm isissued.

CHANNEL USAGE ERROR: In Main Channel Usage item ofthe Provisioning Data, when2M bipolar signal is inputtedinto the channel which haschosen “Not Used”, * mark isdisplayed. And the IDU ALMindicator on the front of theIDU is lighted.

MAIN 2M AIS RCVD: Indicates the status of AIS RCVDsignal for Main INTFC.

INTFC TX ALM: Indicates the operating status of transmitside for Main INTFC. If failure occurs in theINTFC, this alarm is issued.

INTFC RX ALM: Indicates the operating status of receive sidefor Main INTFC. If failure occurs in theINTFC, this alarm is issued.

Page 269: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04054 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5-9

Chart 5-1 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

SUB INTFC 2M LOS: Indicates the input status of the 2.048MB signal for LAN DSC/WS. If theinput is disconnected, this alarm isissued.

Note: Applies only to wayside.

SUB INTFC 2M AIS RCVD: Indicates the status of AISRCVD signal for LAN DSC/WS.

Note: Applies only to wayside.

MAIN INTFC: Indicates the operating status of Main INTFC.If failure occurs in the equipment, alarm isissued.

MODEM: Indicates the operating status of the MODEM. Iffailure occurs in the equipment, this alarm is issued.

SUB INTFC: Indicates the operating status of the LAN DSC/WS. If failure occurs in the equipment, thisalarm is issued.

POWER SUPPLY: Indicates the operating status of powersupply. If failure occurs in the equipment,this alarm is issued.

5 Press the “0” key to logout and press the “Enter” key.

Fig. 5-1 Loopback Diagram for Fault Isolation

U/BCONVDEMRX

B/UCONVMODTX

(b)

IDUODU

RECEIVING END

TX

RX

MOD

DEM

B/UCONV

U/BCONV

PDH/SDHANALYZER

PDH/SDHANALYZER

(a) (c)

ODUIDU

TRANSMITTING END

MODEM MODEM CTRL

SPEEDCONV

SPEEDCONV

SPEEDCONV

SPEEDCONV

CTRL

Page 270: Pasolink Plus

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ROI-S04054

5-10

Chart 5-2 Loopback BER Measurement

Apparatus:PDH/SDH Analyzer

Step Procedure

1 Disconnect the D-sub connectors from the CH1-CH8 IN/OUT or CH9-CH16 IN/OUT on the IDU (see Fig. 5-2),

2 Set the PDH/SDH Analyzer as follows:• Bit rate : 2.048 Mbps• Code format : HDB-3• Level : 2.37 Vo-p• Impedance : 120 ohms, balanced or 75 ohms, unbalanced

3 Set up as in Fig. 5-2,

4 Measure the BER for each channel,

Requirement: 1 × 10–12 or less

Fig. 5-2 BER Measurement Setup

IDU

ALM/AUX CALLRESET

IDU

STATUS

+

R SWEOW

PASOLINK

LAN CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

NE1 NE2 V11PNMS

LAN

ALM

TX

MAINT

SEL VFUSE (7.5A)

PWRIF IN/OUT

PWR +−

WARNING-43V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWERBEFORE DISCONNECTING

I/F CABLE

!

SEL VFUSE (7.5A)

PWRIF IN/OUT

PWR +−WARNING-43V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWERBEFORE DISCONNECTING

I/F CABLE

!

ODURX

G8538 MD UNIT

G8540 SW UNIT

G8538 MD UNIT

1

2

PNMT LCT EOW1 EOW2

CH1-CH8 IN/OUT

SC IN/OUT

CH9-CH16 WS IN/OUT

ALM

LAN DSC/WS

PDH/SDHANALYZER

Notes: 1. Pin assignment of D-sub connector is referred to Table 2-1in Operation.

2. A conversion adapter is required when using equipment bythe 75 ohms interface. Please ask NEC Corporation.

Page 271: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04054 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5-11

Chart 5-3 Loopback Control Setting

This chart contains:A. Preparation: Steps 1 to 8B. IF Loopback Control: Steps 9 to 16C. Main 2M Loopback (Near End) Control:Steps 17 to 24D. Main 2M Loopback (Far End) Control:Steps 25 to 32

Step Procedure

Notes: 1. Service will be interrupted during Loopbackcondition.

2. Following Loopback operation is not performedsimultaneously. • IF Loopback• Near End Loopback• Far End Loopback

3. Loopback operation is not performed with anopposite station simultaneously.

A. PREPERATION

1 Connect the RS-232C cable between the LCT and IDU (seeFig. 2-2 in Chart 2-1),

2 Open the Terminal software (eg; Hyper Terminal),

3 Enter Login name “Admin” and press the “Enter” key onthe LCT,

4 Enter specified password and press the “Enter” key,

Login : AdminPassword : ********

--- NEC PDH RADIO VER. X.XX.XX --- 0. Logout 1. Alarm / Status 2. Performance Monitor 3. Provisioning Data 4. System Configuration 5. Inventory Data 6. Relay / House Keeping 7. MaintenanceEnter Selection :

Page 272: Pasolink Plus

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ROI-S04054

5-12

Chart 5-3 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

5 Press the “7” key for Maintenance and press the “Enter”key,

6 Press the “1” key for MAINT Mode and press the “Enter”key,

7 Press the “1” key for ON and press the “Enter” key,

8 Press the “2” key and press the “Enter” key,

B. IF LOOPBACK CONTROL

Notes: 1. Used for localization of equipment failure in theODU or IDU. The input 2.048 Mbps signal fromMUX is looped back with IF signal via INTFC andMODEM and then output with 2.048 Mbps signal(see Fig. 5-1).

2. Since the operation of RX SW is not connected withIF loopback control, set RX SW manually to thechannel under IF loopback.

Enter Selection : 7

--- Maintenance --- 1. MAINT Mode (OFF) 2. Control 3. Reset CPU 4. Set Calendar 5. Password Setting 6. Program DownloadEnter Selection : 1

--- MAINT Mode --- 1. On 2. OffEnter Selection : 1

--- Maintenance --- 1. MAINT Mode (ON) 2. Control 3. Reset CPU 4. Set Calendar 5. Password Setting 6. Program DownloadEnter Selection :

Page 273: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04054 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5-13

Chart 5-3 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

9 Manually set the TX SW/RX SW to the channel to be tested(for the switching method, refer to Chart 2-2),

10 Press the “7” key for IF loopback and press the “Enter” key,

Note: Setting items displayed on the LCT depend on settingcondition of “System Configuration”.

11 Press the “1” key for ON and press the “Enter” key,

12 Press the “Y” key and press the “Enter” key, then “Success!!” is displayed,

13 After the Loopback test for BER, press the “7” key andpress the “Enter” key,

14 Press the “2” key for OFF and press the “Enter” key,

15 Press the “Y” key and press the “Enter” key, then “Success!!” is displayed,

16 Restore the TX SW/RX SW to automatic condition (forswitching method, refer to Chart 2-2),

Enter Selection : 2

--- Control --- 1. RF Frequency 2. ATPC Manual Control 3. TXSW Manual Control 4. TX Mute 5. RXSW Manual Control 6. CW 7. IF Loopback 8. Main 2M Loopback (Near End) 9. Main 2M Loopback (Far End)99. Antenna Alignment ModeEnter Selection : 7

--- IF Loopback --- 1. On 2. OffEnter Selection : 1

“This will affect the radio link connection”Are You Sure ? (Y/N) : Y

Success !!

Page 274: Pasolink Plus

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ROI-S04054

5-14

Chart 5-3 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

C. MAIN 2M LOOPBACK (NEAR END) CONTROL

Note: Used for localization of equipment failure in the MUX orRadio equipment. The input 2.048 Mbps signal fromMUX is looped back immediately, and then output with2.048 Mbps signal (see Fig. 5-1).

17 Press the “8” key for Main 2M Loopback (Near End) andpress the “Enter” key,

Note: Setting items displayed on the LCT depend on setting condition of“System Configuration”.

Enter Selection : 2

--- Control --- 1. RF Frequency 2. ATPC Manual Control 3. TXSW Manual Control 4. TX Mute 5. RXSW Manual Control 6. CW 7. IF Loopback 8. Main 2M Loopback (Near End) 9. Main 2M Loopback (Far End)99. Antenna Alignment ModeEnter Selection : 8

--- Main 2M Loopback (Near End) --- 1. Selected CH Loopback 2. All CH Loopback OffEnter Selection : 1

--- Selected CH Loopback (Near End) ---Loopback Status (CH1-8) – – – – – – – –

(CH9-16) – – – – – – – ∗CH Select (1-16) : 16

--- CH16 Loopback (Near End) --- 1. On 2. Off

“This will affect the radio link connection”Are You Sure ? (Y/N) : Y

Success !!

Page 275: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04054 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5-15

Chart 5-3 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

18 Press the “1” key and press the “Enter” key,

19 Press the desired channel number key and press the “Enter”key,

20 Press the “1” key for ON and press the “Enter” key,

21 Press the “Y” key and press the “Enter” key, then “Success!!” is displayed,

Note: In the loopback condition, * mark is indicated.

22 After the loopback test for BER, press the “ESC” key toreturn to previous menu,

23 Press the “2” key for All CH Loopback Off and press the“Enter” key,

24 Press the “Y” key and press the “Enter” key, then “Success!!” is displayed,

D. MAIN 2M LOOPBACK (FAR END) CONTROL

Note: Used for localization of equipment failure in the MUX orRadio equipment. Input 2.048 Mbps signal is loopedback with INTFC of IDU at the opposite station and thenoutput with 2.048 Mbps signal (see Fig. 5-1).

--- Main 2M Loopback (Near End) --- 1. Selected CH Loopback 2. All CH Loopback OffEnter Selection : 2

“This will affect the radio link connection”Are You Sure ? (Y/N) : Y

Success !!

Page 276: Pasolink Plus

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ROI-S04054

5-16

Chart 5-3 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

25 Press the “9” key for Main 2M Loopback (Far End) andpress the “Enter” key,

Notes: 1. Indication items on LCT display should be changedaccording to “system configuration”.

2. When the loopback is controlled from opposite station, “Z”mark is indicated.

26 Press the “1” key and press the “Enter” key,

27 Press the desired channel number key and press the “Enter”key,

--- Control --- 1. RF Frequency 2. ATPC Manual Control 3. TXSW Manual Control 4. TX Mute 5. RXSW Manual Control 6. CW 7. IF Loopback 8. Main 2M Loopback (Near End) 9. Main 2M Loopback (Far End)99. Antenna Alignment ModeEnter Selection : 9

--- Main 2M Loopback (Far End) --- 1. Selected CH Loopback 2. All CH Loopback OffEnter Selection : 1

--- Selected CH Loopback (Far End) ---Loopback Status (CH1-8) – – – – – – – –

(CH9-16) – – – – – – – ZCH Select (1-16) : 16

--- CH16 Loopback (Far End) --- 1. On 2. OffEnter Selection : 1

“This will affect the radio link connection”Are You Sure ? (Y/N) : Y

Success !!

Page 277: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04054 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5-17

Chart 5-3 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

28 Press the “1” key for ON and press the “Enter” key,

29 Press the “Y” key and press the “Enter” key, then “Success!!” is displayed,

30 After the loopback test for BER, press the “ESC” key toreturn to previous menu,

31 Press the “2” key for All CH Loopback Off and press the“Enter” key,

32 Press the “Y” key and press the “Enter” key, then “Success!!” is displayed.

5.2 Replacement

The replacement procedures of the IDU and ODU is described below.

5.2.1 IDU Replacement

The procedures for replacing IDU with spare are given in the Chart 5-4.

5.2.2 ODU Replacement

The procedures for replacing the ODU with a spare are given in Chart 5-5.The label attached to the side of ODU indicates the ODU type (see Fig 5-3). To replace the ODU, prepare another ODU of the same type asindicated on the label of the failed one (see Appendix in Descriptionsection).

--- Main 2M Loopback (Far End) --- 1. Selected CH Loopback 2. All CH Loopback OffEnter Selection : 2

“This will affect the radio link connection”Are You Sure ? (Y/N) : Y

Success !!

Page 278: Pasolink Plus

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ROI-S04054

5-18

Fig. 5-3 ODU type and Frequency Indication Label

0678 !PASOLINK

SUB Band

SERIAL No. DATEWEIGHT 10kg/–43V 0.9A

( )

NEC Corporation TOKYO JAPAN MADE IN JAPAN

TXhigh/low

TRP-( )G-1AAOUTDOOR UNIT (HG)

+

TX frequency

6/7/8 GHz Band ODU

11 - 38 GHz Band ODU

PASOLINK

shift frequencySERIAL No. DATE ,

WEIGHT 4.5kg/–43V 0.5A

( )

NEC Corporation TOKYO JAPAN MADE IN JAPAN

TXhigh/low

TRP-( )G-1AAOUTDOOR UNIT (HG)

+

MHz SUB band

0678 !

Page 279: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04054 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5-19

Chart 5-4 IDU Unit Replacement

Warning: Persons performing servicing must take necessary steps toavoid electro-static discharge which may damage themodules or cause error. Wear a conductive wrist strapconnected to the grounded (G) jack on the front of theequipment shelf. This will minimize static build-up duringservicing. (see Fig. 2-1).

This chart contains:

A. No.1 CH MD UNIT replacement: Steps 1 to 14B. No.2 CH MD UNIT replacement: Steps 15 and 16C. SW UNIT replacement: Steps 17 to 28

Apparatus:Suitable Screwdriver

Step Procedure

This IDU consists of three units (No. 1 CH MD UNIT/SWUNIT/No. 2 CH MD UNIT) (see Fig. 5-4). If any unit fails,replace only the unit that fails with a spare following theprocedure described below.

Caution: When the SW UNIT is replaced with spare, service isinterrupted.

A. No.1 CH MD UNIT REPLACEMENT

REMOVING

1 Referring to Chart 2-1, set maintenance mode tomaintenance “ON” position by LCT,

2 Referring to Chart 2-2, perform the protection switching toprotect the system,

3 Turn off the power switch on the No. 1 CH MD UNIT (seeFig. 5-4),

4 Disconnect the power cable from the SEL V connector onthe No.1 CH MD UNIT,

5 Disconnect the IF cable from the IF IN/OUT connector onthe No. 1 CH MD UNIT,

6 Loosen two screws on the No. 1 CH MD UNIT,

Page 280: Pasolink Plus

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ROI-S04054

5-20

Chart 5-4 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

7 To remove the MD UNIT, hold two screws then pull itforward,

REMOUNTING

8 Place a new MD UNIT at the location for mounting, thenpush along the guide rail until the multi-pin connectorexactly fits,

9 Tighten two screws on the MD UNIT (see Fig. 5-4),

10 Reconnect IF cable to IF IN/OUT connector,

11 Reconnect power cable to SEL V connector,

12 Turn on the power switch,

13 Referring to Chart 2-2, reset the protection switching toAUTO position,

14 Referring to Chart 2-1, reset maintenance mode tomaintenance “OFF” position,

B. No. 2 CH MD UNIT REPLACEMENT

REMOVING

15 Repeat steps 1 to 7 for No.2 CH MD UNIT,

REMOUNTING

16 Repeat steps 8 to 14 for No.2 CH MD UNIT,

C. SW UNIT REPLACEMENT

REMOVING

Note: When replacing SW UNIT with spare, replace quickly tominimize service interruption.

17 Turn off the power switch on the No.1 CH MD UNIT, (seeFig. 5-4),

18 Turn off the power switch on the No.2 CH MD UNIT,

19 Disconnect all cables from connectors on the IDU,

20 Disconnect ground cable from FG terminal.

Page 281: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04054 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5-21

Chart 5-4 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

21 Loosen two screws on the SW UNIT,

22 To remove the SW UNIT, hold two screws then pull itforward,

REMOUNTING

23 Before replacing SW UNIT with a spare, all switches on thespare SW UNIT must be verified and properly made priorto attempting switching to meet required function. Namely,all switches are set to the same position as the faulty SWUNIT (see chapter 4 in Operation section),

24 Place a new SW UNIT at the location for mounting, thenpush along the guide rail until the multi-pin connectorexactly fits,

25 Tighten two screws on the SW UNIT (see Fig. 5-4),

26 Reconnect ground cable to FG terminal,

27 Reconnect all cables removed in step 19,

28 Turn on the power switches on the No.1 and No.2 CH MDUNIT.

Fig. 5-4 Screw, Connector and Switch Location

ALM/AUX CALLRESET

IDU

STATUS

+

R SWEOW

PASOLINK

LAN CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

NE1 NE2 V11PNMS

LAN

ALM

TX

MAINT

SEL VFUSE (7.5A)

PWRIF IN/OUT

PWR +−

WARNING-43V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWERBEFORE DISCONNECTING

I/F CABLE

!

SEL VFUSE (7.5A)

PWRIF IN/OUT

PWR +−WARNING-43V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWERBEFORE DISCONNECTING

I/F CABLE

!

ODURX

G8538 MD UNIT

G8540 SW UNIT

G8538 MD UNIT

1

2

PNMT LCT EOW1 EOW2

CH1-CH8 IN/OUT

SC IN/OUT

CH9-CH16 WS IN/OUT

ALM

LAN DSC/WS

SCREW SCREWNo.1 CH MD UNIT No.1 CHPWR SWITCH

No.2 CH MD UNIT No.2 CHPWR SWITCH

No.2 CHSEL V

No.1 CHSEL V

SCREWSW UNITSCREW

Page 282: Pasolink Plus

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ROI-S04054

5-22

Chart 5-5 ODU Replacement

This chart contains:A. 6/7/8 GHz Band ODU: Steps 1 to 12B. 11-38 GHz Band ODU: Steps 13 to 26

Apparatus:T type hexagonal driver

Step Procedure

A. 6/7/8 GHz BAND ODU

REMOVING

1 Turn off the related power switch on the IDU,

2 Remove the self-bonding tape from the IF IN/OUT and RFIN/OUT connectors,

3 Disconnect the IF and RF cables from the IF IN/OUT andRF IN/OUT connectors on the ODU,

4 Loosen the six bolts fixing the ODU with a T type hexagonaldriver,

5 Remove the ODU from the bracket with both hands.

MOUNTING

6 Put the spare ODU onto the bracket,

Page 283: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04054 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5-23

Chart 5-5 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

7 Mount the spare ODU onto the bracket,

8 Tighten the six bolts in order following the number in thefigure with a T type hexagonal driver (recommended torqueis 451 N·cm torque),

9 Reconnect the RF cable to the RF IN/OUT connector on theODU,

10 Reconnect the IF cable to the IF IN/OUT connector on theODU,

11 Wrap the IF IN/OUT and RF IN/OUT connectors with self-bonding tape for waterproofing.

1

2

3

4

5 6

Page 284: Pasolink Plus

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ROI-S04054

5-24

Chart 5-5 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

12 Turn on the related power switch on the IDU.

Note: The self-bonding tape should be prepared by thecustomer.

RF IN/OUT

IF IN/OUT

CABLE

SELF-BONDING TAPE

ODU

CABLE

Page 285: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04054 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5-25

Chart 5-5 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

B. 11-38 GHz BAND ODU

REMOVING

13 Turn off the power switch on the IDU,

14 Remove the self-bonding tape from the IF IN/OUTconnector,

15 Disconnect the IF cable from the IF IN/OUT connector onthe ODU,

16 Loosen the four bolts fixing the ODU with a T typehexagonal driver,

17 Remove the ODU from the bracket with both hands,

MOUNTING

18 When vertical polarization is required, rotate the ODU sothat the plate marked V is on top,

Note: Remove the protection metallic plate covering the waveguidehole on ODU.

SCREWS

SCREWS

Page 286: Pasolink Plus

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ROI-S04054

5-26

Chart 5-5 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

19 When horizontal polarization is required, remove the guidepin fixed on the plate marked with V.

20 Insert the guide pin removed in step 19 behind of the platemarked H.

21 Rotate the ODU so that the plate marked H is on top.

GUIDE PIN

PLATE MARKED WITH V

Page 287: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04054 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5-27

Chart 5-5 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

22 Put the spare ODU onto the bracket,

Note: Be careful not to damage the flange.

GUIDE PIN

PLATE MARKED WITH H

PLATE MARKED WITH V

UP

V POLARIZATION

PLATE MARKED WITH H

UP

H POLARIZATIONV/H Polarization Conversion

Page 288: Pasolink Plus

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ROI-S04054

5-28

Chart 5-5 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

23 Mount the spare ODU onto the bracket, and tighten the fourscrews on the ODU,

24 Reconnect the IF cable to the IF IN/OUT connector on theODU,

SCREWS

SCREWS

ODU

Page 289: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04054 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5-29

Chart 5-5 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

25 Wrap the IF IN/OUT connector with self-bonding tape forwaterproofing.

26 Turn on the power switch on the IDU.

Note: The self-bonding tape should be prepared by thecustomer.

This part should be wrapped byself-bonding tape for waterproofing.

ODU

IF CABLE

SELF-BONDING TAPE

ODU

IFL CONNECTOR

SELF-BONDING TAPE

ODU

IF CABLE

IN CASE OF L ANGLE

Page 290: Pasolink Plus

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ROI-S04054

5-30

5.3 Alignment

After replacing the unit with spares, the equipment must be aligned aslisted in Table 5-2. The inventory information of each module in theequipment is displayed as shown in Chart 5-11.

Notes: 1. * This procedure is to be performed, as required.2. ** The BER measurement is optional, perform if necessary.3. All items must be restored to original condition.

Table 5-2 Equipment Alignment

Equipment Replaced Module/Unit Alignment Item Reference

Procedure

IDU MD UNIT 1. System Configuration Setting Chart 5-6

2. Provisioning Setting Chart 5-8

3. BER Measurement ** Chart 5-10

4. Meter Reading Chart 4-1

SW UNIT 1. System Configuration Setting Chart 5-6

2. Date and Time Setting Chart 5-7

3. Provisioning Setting Chart 5-8

4. Relay/House Keeping Setting* Chart 5-9

5. BER Measurement ** Chart 5-10

6. Meter Reading Chart 4-1

ODU ODU 1. System Configuration Setting Chart 5-6

2. BER Measurement ** Chart 5-10

3. Meter Reading Chart 4-1

Page 291: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04054 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5-31

Chart 5-6 System Configuration Setting

This chart describes the procedure for setting the system configuration.The items to be set are as follows:

• Equipment Configuration• Main Interface• RF Frequency• TX Power Control• Frame ID

Setting of the system configuration should be performed in followingorder.

Step Procedure

1 Referring to Fig. 2-2 in Chart 2-1, connect the RS-232Ccable between the LCT and the IDU,

2 Open the Terminal software (eg; Hyper Terminal),

3 Enter Login name “Admin” and press the “Enter” key,

4 Enter specified password and press the “Enter” key,

Login : AdminPassword : ********

--- NEC PDH RADIO VER. X.XX.XX --- 0. Logout 1. Alarm / Status 2. Performance Monitor 3. Provisioning Data 4. System Configuration 5. Inventory Data 6. Relay / House Keeping 7. MaintenanceEnter Selection :

Page 292: Pasolink Plus

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ROI-S04054

5-32

Chart 5-6 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

5 Press the “4” key for setting the System Configuration andpress the “Enter” key,

Following is an explanation of each item under the SystemConfiguration menu.

• Display Radio Equipment ConfigurationSelects to display radio equipment configuration.

• Setup Radio Equipment ConfigurationSelects to set radio equipment configuration.

6 Press the “2” key for setting the Equipment Configurationand press the “Enter” key,

Selects the system from the following two choices.1+0 (Expandable) : Selects this if the system has currently no

protection unit and the system can beexpanded from 1+0 to a 1+1 system inthe future.

Note: No.1 channel MD UNIT is used inthe system and No.2 channel MDUNIT is not used.

1+1 (Hot standby) : Selects this for 1+1 Hot-standby system.Note: In 1+1 Hot-standby system, No.1

and No.2 channel ODUs willautomatically have the sameselected settings.

Enter Selection : 4

--- System Configuration --- 1. Display Radio Equipment Configuration 2. Setup Radio Equipment ConfigurationEnter Selection :

--- Equipment Configuration --- 1. 1+0 (Expandable) 2. 1+1 (Hot Standby)Current Setting : 1Enter Selection ([RET] = No Change) :

Page 293: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04054 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5-33

Chart 5-6 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

7 After setting, press “Enter” key for setting the MainInterface,

The interface requirement of main signal is selected from thefollowing two systems.8*2 MB: 2 MB × 8 system.16*2 MB: 2 MB × 16 system

8 After setting, press the “Enter” key for setting the RFFrequency,

It is necessary to set frequencies of the No.1 ODUs. Whenthe transmitting frequency is set, the receiving frequency isautomatically set. For 6/7/8 GHz band ODUs, the TXfrequency setting must be the same as that indicated on thelabel attached on the side of the ODU. For the 11-38 GHzband ODUs, the actual transmit frequency setting that isentered should be within the TX frequency band of the ODU(see Appendix in Description section). For 11-38 GHz bandODUs, the frequency setting should be at least + 21 MHzaway from the band’s “Start” frequency and at least − 21MHz away from the band’s “Stop” frequency. The band’s“Start” and “Stop” frequency are displayed on the LCT.

--- Main Interface --- 1. 8*2MB 2. 16*2MBCurrent Setting : 1Enter Selection ([RET] = No Change) :

--- RF Frequency ---Current TX Frequency = XXXXX.XXX[MHz]Current RX Frequency = XXXXX.XXX[MHz]Start TX Frequency = XXXXX.XXX[MHz]Stop TX Frequency = XXXXX.XXX[MHz]Shift Frequency = XXXXX.XXX[MHz]

Enter TX Frequency ([RET] = No Change) :

Page 294: Pasolink Plus

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ROI-S04054

5-34

Chart 5-6 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

9 After setting the RF frequency, press the “Enter” key.When prompted “Are You Sure? (Y/N)”, press the “Y” andpress the “Enter” key,

An operation mode of transmission power control is selectedfrom the following two modes.ATPC : Automatic Transmission Power ControlMTPC : Manual Transmission Power Control

Note: Set the MTPC mode during antenna orientation. WhenATPC operation is required, set to the ATPC modeafter antenna orientation has been completed.

10 After setting, press the “Enter” key for setting the FrameID,

The frame ID is set in order to discriminate the signal. As asignal with a different ID cannot be received, the ID of theopposite station should be the same. In the 1+1 Hot standbysystem, both No.1 and No.2 channels should have the sameID. The number of IDs which can be set up is eight; ID1through ID8.

11 After setting the Frame ID, press the “Enter” key. Whenprompted “Are You Sure? (Y/N)”, press the “Y” and pressthe “Enter” key,

12 After setting the System Configuration, proceed to Chart 5-7 for time setting.

--- TX Power Control --- 1. MTPC 2. ATPCCurrent Setting : 1Enter Selection ([RET] = No Change) :

--- Frame ID --- 1. ID1 2. ID2 3. ID3 4. ID4 5. ID5 6. ID6 7. ID7 8. ID8Current Setting : 1Enter Selection ([RET] = No Change) :

Page 295: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04054 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5-35

Chart 5-7 Date and Time Setting

This chart describes the procedure for setting date and time. When theIDU is turned off for an extended period (i.e. approx. 1 week), theequipment time setting could have been cleared. In such case, verify andre-enter the time setting after turning on the IDU.

Step Procedure

1 Press the “ESC” key to go back to the following menu,

2 Press the “7” key for Maintenance and press the “Enter”key,

3 Press the “4” key for setting the Set Calendar and press the“Enter” key,

Password : ********

--- NEC PDH RADIO VER. X.XX.XX --- 0. Logout 1. Alarm / Status 2. Performance Monitor 3. Provisioning Data 4. System Configuration 5. Inventory Data 6. Relay / House Keeping 7. MaintenanceEnter Selection :

Enter Selection : 7

--- Maintenance --- 1. MAINT Mode (OFF) 2. Control 3. Reset CPU 4. Set Calendar 5. Password Setting 6. Program DownloadEnter Selection : 4

--- Set Calendar ---Enter Year : 2001Enter Month : 2Enter Day : 28Enter Hour : 18Enter Min : 20Enter Sec : 40

Success !!

Page 296: Pasolink Plus

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ROI-S04054

5-36

Chart 5-7 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

4 Set all items according to display of the LCT,

5 After setting the time, proceed to Chart 5-8 for theProvisioning setting.

Page 297: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04054 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5-37

Chart 5-8 Provisioning Setting

This chart describes the procedure for setting the provisioning. Settingitems are as follows:

• Main Channel Usage• BER Threshold• Sub Interface• SC Assignment• MTPC TX PWR• ATPC Range• RX Threshold• Additional ATT• ODU ALM MODE• TX SW Priority• RX SW Priority• Channel Usage Error• BER AIS

Step Procedure

1 Press the “ESC” key to go back to the following menu,

2 Press the “3” key for Provisioning Data and press the“Enter” key,

Following is explanation each item of Provisioning Data.• Display Current Data

Selects to display current provisioning data.• Set Provisioning Data

Selects to set provisioning data.

Password : ********

--- NEC PDH RADIO VER. X.XX.XX --- 0. Logout 1. Alarm / Status 2. Performance Monitor 3. Provisioning Data 4. System Configuration 5. Inventory Data 6. Relay / House Keeping 7. MaintenanceEnter Selection :

--- Provisioning Data --- 1. Display Current Data 2. Set Provisioning DataEnter Selection :

Page 298: Pasolink Plus

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ROI-S04054

5-38

Chart 5-8 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

The factory settings are also listed in the following table. Tochange these settings, proceed to the following step.

Notes: 1. * In the factory setting, the TX output power is 25 dBlower than the standard level since the MTPC TX PWRis set to −25 dB. If the standard output level is required,set MTPC TX PWR to 0 dB.

2. Provisioning items that cannot be set for the selectedoperating mode are not displayed on the LCT.

ItemFactory Setting

RemarksHS System

Main Channel Usage 2M Used

10BASE-T Used When main 10BASE-T is mounted asoption.

BER Threshold 1E-4

Sub Interface WS: Used When WS is mounted as option.

10BASE-T DSC/WS: DSC When main 10BASE-T is mounted asoption.

SC Assignment EasyVF1: DSC2

DSC 9.6KB-1*: DSC3

DSC 9.6KB-2**: DSC4

Cluster ALM: Not Used

10BASE-T DSC: DSC4***

*When the DSC 64 KB is mounted, set toDSC3 Co-directional.**When the DSC 64 KB is mounted, set toDSC4 Co-directional.

***When the 10BASE-T/WS settingunder Sub Interface is “used”.

MTPC TX PWR −25 dB*

ATPC Range (max. to min.) 0 to −25 dB

RX Threshold −55 dBm

Additional ATT 0 dB

ODU ALM MODE Hold

TX SW Priority Non-priority

RX SW Priority Non-priority

Channel Usage Error Report

BER AIS On

Page 299: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04054 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5-39

Chart 5-8 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

3 Press the “2” key and press the “Enter” key,

Note: Setting items displayed on the LCT depend on settingcondition of “System Configuration”.

4 Press the “1” key for setting the Main Channel Usage andpress the “Enter” key. Then select the channel number to beset,

The main channel signal to be used is selected from thefollowing items.Not Used : If there is a channel which is not used, it will

surely be set to “Not Used”.2M Used : When the 2.048 Mbps signal is required, the “2M

Used” is selected.10BASE-T Used : When the 10BASE-T signal is required,

the “10BASE-T Used” is selected.Note: When main 10BASE-T is mounted

as option, CH1 to CH4 should beselected.

--- Provisioning Data --- 1. Display Current Data 2. Set Provisioning DataEnter Selection : 2

--- Set Provisioning Data --- 1. Main Channel Usage 2. BER Threshold 3. Sub Interface 4. SC Assignment 5. MTPC TXPWR 6. ATPC Range 8. RX Threshold 9. Additional ATT10. ODU ALM Mode13. TXSW Priority14. RXSW Priority15. Channel Usage Error16. BER AISEnter Selection :

--- Main Channel Usage Setting --- 0. Not Used 1. 2M Used 2. 10BASE-T UsedCurrent Setting : 1Enter Selection ([RET] = No Change) :

Page 300: Pasolink Plus

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ROI-S04054

5-40

Chart 5-8 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

5 After setting, press the “ESC” key to go back to menu shownin step 3,

6 Press the “2” key for setting the BER Threshold and pressthe “Enter” key,

BER Threshold sets the threshold level of BER. There are foursettable threshold values; 1×10-3, 1×10-4, 1×10-5 and 1×10-6.

Note: In the 1E-6 (1 × 10-6), release of an alarm takes a fewminutes.

7 Press the “ESC” key to go back to the menu shown in step 3,

8 Press the “3” key for setting the Sub Interface and press the“Enter” key,

Sub interface sets when using an optional interface card(LAN DSC/WS).WS : When wayside (WS) is used as Option (Applies only to

2 MB × 16 system).10BASE-T DSC/WS: When the LAN DSC/WS is used as

Option.Note: WS and 10BASE-T WS cannot be used at a time.

When the 10BASE-T DSC is selected, any one ofDSC2 through DSC4 in the SC Assignment should beset.

9 Press the “ESC” key to go back to the menu shown in step 3,

--- BER Threshold --- 1. 1E-3 2. 1E-4 3. 1E-5 4. 1E-6 (Deactivation time is mare than a few minutes)Current Setting : 2Enter Selection ([RET] = No Change) :

--- Sub Interface--- 1. WS 2. 10BASE-T DSC/WSEnter Selection :

Page 301: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04054 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5-41

Chart 5-8 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

10 Press the “4” key for setting the SC Assignment and pressthe “Enter” key,

SC Assignment sets Used/Not Used for service channel andsignal assignment. As service channel, one analog voicefrequency (VF) signal, two digital V11 (9.6K) signals, twodigital V11 (64K) signals, one CLSTR alarm, and one digitalLAN DSC channel can be used.

Note: LAN DSC/WS should be set in customize mode.Easy : When easy is selected, the same setting as factory

setting is used.Customize : When customize is selected it allows to select

three out of the five available channels andassign them to any of the DSC2 through 4.Selection of Co-Directional of Contra-directional is available for V11 (64K) signal(optional).• Two V11 (9.6K/64K*) channels• One VF channel• One cluster alarm• One LAN DSC channel − option

Notes: 1. If V11 (64k) sub interface is mounted, the two V11channels can be used either 64k or 9.6k. But incase 9.6k is used, "contra directional" should beselected as clock direction.

2. * Optional.

11 Press the “ESC” key to go back to the menu shown in step 3,

--- SC Assignment --- 1. Easy 2. CustomizeCurrent Setting : 1Enter Selection ([RET] = No Change) :

Page 302: Pasolink Plus

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ROI-S04054

5-42

Chart 5-8 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

12 Press the “5” key for setting the TX PWR and press the“Enter” key,

MTPC TX PWR sets the transmission power in MTPCoperation. If the attenuation is set to 0 dB, maximum outputpower is obtained. Setting is available in the range of −25 to0 dB. The level is not indicated in the ATPC mode.

13 Press the “ESC” key to go back to the menu shown in step 3,

14 Press the “6” key for setting the ATPC Range and press the“Enter” key,

ATPC Range sets the maximum or minimum transmissionpower during ATPC operation. If the ATPC Maximum PWRis set to 0 dB, the maximum output power is obtained. In theMTPC mode, this menu will not appear.

Note: Example of ATPC setting.Where ATPC MAXIMUM PWR of ATPC Range is setto 0 dB, ATPC MINIMUM PWR is set to -10 dB andRX Threshold to -60 dBm. In this case, if RX level issmaller than -60 dBm, monitor/control is performedwith the interval of 8 msec. RX level is monitored in 1dB step, and TX output is controlled in 1 dB step.However, a fixed hysteresis of 5 dB referred to the RXThreshold is implemented for ATPC operation.Example: If RX Threshold is set to -60 dBm, no outputcontrol is made unless the RX level goes below -60dBm or goes above -55 dBm, so that the receive level ismaintained within -60 to -55 dBm.

--- MTPC TX PWR ---Current (-25 to 0dB) : -25Enter Selection ([RET] = No Change) :

--- ATPC Maximum PWR ---Current (-25 to 0dB) : 0Enter Selection ([RET] = No Change) :

--- ATPC Minimum PWR ---Current (-25 to [MAX]dB) : -10Enter Selection ([RET] = No Change) :

Page 303: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04054 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5-43

Chart 5-8 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

15 After setting, press the “ESC” key to go back to the menushown in step 3,

16 Press the “8” key for setting the RX Threshold and press the“Enter” key,

RX Threshold sets the threshold value of receiving level.Note: For details, refer to 2.4.4 (Automatic Transmitter

Power Control) of Chapter 2 in Description section.

17 Press the “ESC” key to go back to the menu shown in step 3,

18 Press the “9” key for setting the Additional ATT and pressthe “Enter” key,

The additional ATT is a span attenuator that is used to reducethe transmit power like in cases where the transmission lengthis short. First, the transmit output power is adjusted bysetting the MTPC TX Power. If the MTPC TX Power settingis insufficient, then set the Additional ATT. The availablesetting range is from 0 to 5 dB.

Note: This function can not be used in 38 GHz band ODU.Do not set to any values other than 0 dB.

19 Press the “ESC” key to go back to the menu,

-55 dBm

RX LEVEL

-60 dBm(RX THRESHOLD LEVEL)

5 dB(ATPCHYSTERESIS)

--- RX Threshold---Current (-55 to –30dBm) : -55Enter Selection ([RET] = No Change) :

--- Additional ATT ---Current (0 to 5dB) : 0Enter Selection ([RET] = No Change) :

Page 304: Pasolink Plus

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ROI-S04054

5-44

Chart 5-8 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

20 Press the “1”, “0” key for setting the ODU ALM Mode andpress the “Enter” key,

This item defines the ODU transmit power level whencommunication between IDU and ODU is lost. This settingis not used when the equipment is set for MTPC operationand is thus, not displayed.MAX Hold : Selects this to cause the ODU to transmit at the

ATPC Maximum PWR setting.MIN Hold : Selects this to cause the ODU to transmit at the

ATPC Minimum PWR setting.Hold : Selects this to cause the ODU to maintain the transmit

power at the time of failure.

21 Press the “ESC” key to go back to the menu shown in step 3,

22 Press the “1”, “3” key for setting the TXSW Priority andpress the “Enter” key,

TX SW Priority sets the priority of switchover for TX switch.Non-priority: There is no priority.Priority NO.1: Priority is given to No.1 channel.

23 Press the “ESC” key to go back to the menu shown in step 3,

--- ODU ALM Mode --- 1. MAX Hold 2. MIN Hold 3. HoldCurrent Setting : 3Enter Selection ([RET] = No Change) :

--- TXSW Priority --- 1. Non-priority 2. Priority No.1Current Setting : 1Enter Selection ([RET] = No Change) :

Page 305: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04054 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5-45

Chart 5-8 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

24 Press the “1”, “4” key for setting the RXSW Priority andpress the “Enter” key,

RX SW Priority sets the priority of switchover for RX switch.Non-priority: There is no priority.Priority NO.1: Priority is given to No.1 channel.

25 Press the “ESC” key to go back to menu shown in step 3,

26 Press the “1”, “5” key for setting the Channel Usage Errorand press the “Enter” key,

Channel Usage Error sets the whether alarm in Main ChannelUsage item is displayed, or it does not displayed.

Report: In Main Channel Usage item, when 2M bipolarsignal is inputted into the channel which has chosen“Not Used”, alarm is displayed.

Not Report: In Main Channel Usage item, even if it hasinputted 2M bipolar signal into the channelwhich has chosen “Not Used”, alarm is notdisplayed

Note: The alarm of Channel Usage Error is displayed on theChannel Usage Error item of Alarm/Status. And the IDUALM indicator on the front of the IDU is lighted.

27 Press the “ESC” key to go back to menu shown in step 3,

--- RXSW Priority --- 1. Non-priority 2. Priority No.1Current Setting : 1Enter Selection ([RET] = No Change) :

--- Channel Usage Error --- 1. Report 2. Not ReportCurrent Setting : 1Enter Selection ([RET] = No Change) :

Page 306: Pasolink Plus

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ROI-S04054

5-46

Chart 5-8 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

28 Press the “1”, “6” key for setting the BER AIS and press the“Enter” key,

BER AIS Control sets the whether main 2M AIS signal isoutputed or it does not carry out.

ON: When the BER ALM is occurred, Main 2M AIS signalis outputed.

Note: Setting point of BER ALM can be set by BERthreshold item in 1 × 10-3 to 1 × 10-6.

OFF: When the BER ALM is occurred, Main 2M AIS signalis not outputed.

29 After setting the Provisioning data, proceed to Chart 5-9 forthe optional relay house keeping setting, as required.Otherwise, press the “ESC” key to go back to the menushown in step 3.

--- BER AIS Control --- 1. ON 2. OFFCurrent Setting : 1Enter Selection ([RET] = No Change) :

Page 307: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04054 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5-47

Chart 5-9 Relay/House Keeping Setting

This chart describes the procedure for setting the parallel alarm output andthe status of House Keeping.

The procedure in this chart is to be performed, as required.

Step Procedure

1 Press the “ESC” key twice to go back to the following menu,

2 Press the “6” key for Relay/House Keeping and press the“Enter” key,

The relay configuration setting and alarm output selection isexplained below.

• Display Current StateSelects to display House Keeping current state.

Password : ********

--- NEC PDH RADIO VER. X.XX.XX --- 0. Logout 1. Alarm / Status 2. Performance Monitor 3. Provisioning Data 4. System Configuration 5. Inventory Data 6. Relay / House Keeping 7. MaintenanceEnter Selection :

Enter Selection : 6

--- Relay / House Keeping --- 1. Display Current State 2. Relay Configuration 3. Output ControlEnter Selection :

Page 308: Pasolink Plus

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ROI-S04054

5-48

Chart 5-9 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

3 Press the “2” key for setting the Relay Configuration andpress the “Enter” key,

• Relay ConfigurationA maximum of 11 relays can be defined to provide parallelalarm outputs. The alarms that would cause RL1 to RL3 tobe triggered are pre-assigned while the alarms that wouldcause RL4 to RL11 to be triggered can be selected for eachrelay. It is also possible to define RL8 to RL11 as HK CONToutputs instead of alarm outputs as shown in the table below.If RL8 to RL11 are not assigned as HK CONT outputs, theymay be used as alarm outputs (see Table 2-2, chapter 2 inOperation section). As shown in Table 2-2 (chapter 2 inOperation section), more than one alarm may be assigned toeach relay.

RL1 to RL11 are FORM C relays. In the normal or controloff condition, the COM and NC terminals of the relays form aclosed circuit and the COM and NO terminals from an opencircuit. In the alarm or control on condition, the COM andNC terminals of the relays form an open circuit and the COMand NO terminals from a closed circuit.

--- Relay Configuration --- 1. HK-OUT 1/2/3/4 Enable 2. HK-OUT 1/2/3 Enable 3. HK-OUT 1/2 Enable 4. HK-OUT 1 Enable 5. HK-OUT DisableEnter Selection ([RET] = No Change) :

Relay RL08 RL09 RL10 RL11

1. HK-OUT 1/2/3/4 Enable HK-OUT4 HK-OUT3 HK-OUT2 HK-OUT1

2. HK-OUT 1/2/3 Enable ALM HK-OUT3 HK-OUT2 HK-OUT1

3. HK-OUT 1/2 Enable ALM ALM HK-OUT2 HK-OUT1

4. HK-OUT 1 Enable ALM ALM ALM HK-OUT1

5. HK-OUT Disable ALM ALM ALM ALM

NCCOMNO

(FORM-C)

Page 309: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04054 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5-49

Chart 5-9 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

Note: The relay is rated at 0.2 A.

4 First, if the four HK control output are required, press the“1” key and press the “Enter” key,

5 Then, the desired alarm name is selected,

Mask : Indicates that no alarm is issued at Maintenance.Out : Indicates that an alarm is issued from the corresponding

relay.– : No relationHK : Indicates that the Relay is assigned for HK control.

Note: While the CPU is initialized by depressing the RESETswitch, alarm(s) is in normal condition. Afterinitialization, the alarm information is properlyprovided through relay contacts.

Then select the relay that will be associated to the alarm thatwas previously selected.

--- Relay Configuration --- 1. HK-OUT 1/2/3/4 Enable 2. HK-OUT 1/2/3 Enable 3. HK-OUT 1/2 Enable 4. HK-OUT 1 Enable 5. HK-OUT DisableEnter Selection ([RET] = No Change) :

RL01 RL02 RL03 RL04 RL05 RL06 RL07 RL08 RL09 RL10 RL11MAINT Out Mask Mask Mask Mask Mask Mask HK HK HK HKPS ALM - Out - - - - - HK HK HK HKCPU ALM - - Out - - - - HK HK HK HK

8. ODU ALM1 - - - Out - - - HK HK HK HK 9. ODU ALM2 - - - Out - - - HK HK HK HK10. IDU ALM1 - - - - Out - - HK HK HK HK11. IDU ALM2 - - - - Out - - HK HK HK HKEnter Selection([RET]=No Change):

Page 310: Pasolink Plus

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ROI-S04054

5-50

Chart 5-9 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

Notes: 1. “Out” is appended to a relay that has already beenassigned to the alarm, selecting it unassigns thealarm to the relay.

2. If “Are You Sure? (Y/N)” is displayed, press the “Y”key. Otherwise, it is not registered.

6 If required, press the “3” key to control external equipmentconnected to the relays assigned as HK-OUT,

• Output ControlThis function can be used to remotely control externalapparatus in the station (e.g. A/C on/off).CONT Off:COM and NC terminals of relay are connected.CONT On:COM and NO terminals of relay are connected.Notes: 1. Output control item is displayed only when the HK-

OUT Enable is selected in the relay configuration(step 4).

2. A setup will be cleared if a power supply is turnedoff.

7 After setting the Relay/House Keeping setting, press the“ESC” key to go back to the menu.

--- Relay Configuration --- 4. RL04 (Out) 5. RL05 6. RL06 7. RL07 8. RL08 9. RL0910. RL1011. RL11Enter Selection([RET]=No Change):

--- Output Control --- 1. HK-OUT1 (CONT Off) 2. HK-OUT2 (CONT Off) 3. HK-OUT3 (CONT On) 4. HK-OUT4 (CONT Off)Enter Selection : 1

Page 311: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04054 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5-51

Chart 5-10 BER Measurement

Apparatus:PDH/SDH Analyzer

Step Procedure

1 At the transmitting end, disconnect the D-sub from theCH1-CH8 IN/OUT or CH9-CH16 IN/OUT on the IDU (seeFig. 5-5),

2 At the receiving end, disconnect the D-sub from the CH1-CH8 IN/OUT or CH9-CH16 IN/OUT on the IDU (see Fig. 5-5),

3 At both transmitting and receiving ends, set the PDH/SDHAnalyzer as follows:• Bit rate : 2.048 Mbps• Code format : HDB-3• Level : 2.37 Vo-p• Impedance : 120 ohms, balanced or 75 ohms, unbalanced

4 At both transmitting and receiving ends, set up as shown inFig. 5-5,

5 In HS system, set the TX SW on the ODU to be measured tothe ON condition at the transmitting end (for switchingmethod, refer to Chart 2-2),

6 Set the RX SW on the CTRL to the channel to be measured(for switching method, refer to Chart 2-2),

7 Measure the BER for each channel.Requirement: 1 × 10–12 or less

Page 312: Pasolink Plus

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ROI-S04054

5-52

Notes: 1. Pin assignment of D-sub connector is referred to Table 2-1in Operation section.

2. A conversion adapter is required when using equipment by75 ohms interface. Please ask NEC Corporation.

Fig. 5-5 BER Measurement Setup

CH1-CH8 IN/OUT

TRANSMITTING END

IDU

CH9-CH16 IN/OUT

RECEIVING END

CH9-CH16 IN/OUT

IDU

PDH/SDHANALYZER

ALM/AUX CALLRESET

IDU

STATUS

+

R SWEOW

PASOLINK

LAN CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

NE1 NE2 V11PNMS

LAN

ALM

TX

MAINT

SEL VFUSE (7.5A)

PWRIF IN/OUT

PWR +−

WARNING-43V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWERBEFORE DISCONNECTING

I/F CABLE

!

SEL VFUSE (7.5A)

PWRIF IN/OUT

PWR +−WARNING-43V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWERBEFORE DISCONNECTING

I/F CABLE

!

ODURX

G8538 MD UNIT

G8540 SW UNIT

G8538 MD UNIT

1

2

PNMT LCT EOW1 EOW2

CH1-CH8 IN/OUT

SC IN/OUT

CH9-CH16 WS IN/OUT

ALM

LAN DSC/WS

ALM/AUX CALLRESET

IDU

STATUS

+

R SWEOW

PASOLINK

LAN CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

NE1 NE2 V11PNMS

LAN

ALM

TX

MAINT

SEL VFUSE (7.5A)

PWRIF IN/OUT

PWR +−

WARNING-43V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWERBEFORE DISCONNECTING

I/F CABLE

!

SEL VFUSE (7.5A)

PWRIF IN/OUT

PWR +−WARNING-43V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWERBEFORE DISCONNECTING

I/F CABLE

!

ODURX

G8538 MD UNIT

G8540 SW UNIT

G8538 MD UNIT

1

2

PNMT LCT EOW1 EOW2

CH1-CH8 IN/OUT

SC IN/OUT

CH9-CH16 WS IN/OUT

ALM

LAN DSC/WS

CH1-CH8 IN/OUT

PDH/SDHANALYZER

Page 313: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04054 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5-53

Chart 5-11 Inventory Data Monitoring

Step Procedure

1 Referring to Fig. 2-2 in Chart 2-1, connect the RS-232Ccable between the LCT and the IDU,

2 Open the Terminal software (ex. Hyper Terminal),

3 Enter Login name “Admin” and press the “Enter” key,

4 Enter the specified password and press the “Enter” key,

5 Press the “5” key for Inventory Data and press the “Enter”key,

Each item in the inventory data is explained below.• ODU No.1 : Indicates the information on the No.1 channel

ODU.• ODU No.2 : Indicates the information on the No.2 channel

ODU.• MD UNIT No.1 : Indicates MD UNIT mounted on the top

layer of the three-layer equipment.

Login : AdminPassword : ********

--- NEC PDH RADIO VER. X.XX.XX --- 0. Logout 1. Alarm / Status 2. Performance Monitor 3. Provisioning Data 4. System Configuration 5. Inventory Data 6. Relay / House Keeping 7. MaintenanceEnter Selection :

Display Inventory data

Module | Code No. | Date | Serial No. | HW Type.| SW Ver.---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ODU No.1 | G7965A | 2001/01/27 | 004004 | 001S | 1.00 ODU No.2 | G7965A | 2001/01/27 | 004002 | 001S | 1.00 MD UNIT No.1 | G8538A | 2001/02/20 | 004002 | - | 1.00 SW UNIT | G8540A | 2001/02/20 | 004002 | - | 1.00 MD UNIT No.2 | G8538A | 2001/02/20 | 004002 | - | 1.00

Page 314: Pasolink Plus

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ROI-S04054

5-5454 pages

Chart 5-11 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

• SW UNIT : Indicates the UNIT located at the middle layer ofthe three-layer.

• MD UNIT No.2 : Indicates the UNIT mounted on the lowerlayer of the three-layer equipment.

Note: The end of HW Type shows the kind of ODU.S: Super High Grade (SHG) H: High Grade (HG)

6 Press the “ESC” key,

7 Press the “0” key to Logout and press the “Enter” key.

Page 315: Pasolink Plus

ROI-S04054 APPENDIX

A-1

APPENDIX CHANGES OF PASSWORD

1. General

This Appendix provides the procedure for changing the password.

Note: If you forget a password, login of LCT is impossible. When youchange be careful enough.

2. Procedure

Procedures for changing the password is referred to the Chart A-1.

Chart A-1 Password Changing

Step Procedure

1 Connect the RS-232C cable between the LCT and IDU,

2 Open the Terminal software (ex. Hyper Terminal),

3 Enter Login name “Admin” and press the “Enter” key,

Login : AdminPassword : ********

--- NEC PDH RADIO VER. X.XX.XX --- 0. Logout 1. Alarm / Status 2. Performance Monitor 3. Provisioning Data 4. System Configuration 5. Inventory Data 6. Relay / House Keeping 7. MaintenanceEnter Selection :

Page 316: Pasolink Plus

APPENDIX ROI-S04054

A-22 pages

Chart A-1 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

4 Enter the specified password and press the “Enter” key,

5 Press the “7” key and press the “Enter” key,

6 Press the “5” key for password setting and press the“Enter” key,

7 Enter the current password and press the “Enter” key,

8 Enter the new password (8 figures) and press the “Enter”key,

9 To confirm the password, re-enter the new password andpress the “Enter” key,

10 Press the “ESC” key to return to previous menu,

11 Press the “0” key to logout.

Enter Selection : 7

--- Maintenance --- 1. MAINT Mode (XXX) 2. Control 3. Reset CPU 4. Set Calendar 5. Password Setting 6. Program DownloadEnter Selection : 5

--- Password Setting ---Enter Current Password : ********Enter New Password : ********Enter New Password : ********

--- Maintenance --- 1. MAINT Mode (XXX) 2. Control 3. Reset CPU 4. Set Calendar 5. Password Setting 6. Program DownloadEnter Selection :